Контроллер nice 3000 коды ошибок

Brief NICE3000 Instruction Manual

7.2 Fault Information and Troubleshooting

If an alarm is reported, the system performs corresponding processing based on the fault

level. You can handle the fault according to the possible causes described in the following

table.

Table 7-2 Fault codes and troubleshooting

Fault

Name

Code

Invert unit

E01

protection

Over-current

E02

during

acceleration

Over-current

E03

during

deceleration

Possible Causes

1. The main circuit

output is grounded or

short circuited.

1. Eliminate external faults.

2. The connecting

2. Install a reactor or an output

cable of the motor is

filter.

too long.

3. Check the air channel and

3. The working

the cooling fan.

temperature is too

4. Contact the agent or

high.

Monarch.

4. The internal

connections become

loose.

1. The main circuit

1. Check whether the RUN

output is grounded or

contactor at the controller

short circuited.

output side is normal.

2. Motor auto-

2. Check whether the power

tuning is performed

cable jacket is damaged,

improperly.

whether the power cable is

3. The load is too

possibly short circuited to

heavy.

ground and whether the cable

4. The encoder signal

is connected reliably.

is incorrect.

3. Check the insulation of motor

5. The UPS running

power terminals, and check

feedback signal is

whether the motor winding is

abnormal.

short-circuited or grounded.

4. Check whether the shorting

1. The main circuit

PMSM stator contactor causes

output is grounded or

controller output short circuit.

short circuited.

5. Check whether motor

2. Motor auto-

parameters comply with the

tuning is performed

nameplate.

improperly.

6. Perform motor auto-tuning

3. The load is too

again.

heavy.

7. Check whether the brake

4. The deceleration

keeps released before the fault

rate is too short.

occurs and whether the brake is

5. The encoder is

stuck mechanically.

seriously interfered

(To be continued)

with.

— 83 —

Troubleshooting

Solution

Level

5

5

5

Related Manuals for Monarch NICE3000

 NICE3000 new User Manual Preface - 1 - Preface Thank you for purchasing the NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller. The NICE3000 new is a new-generation integrated elevator controller independently developed by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd., by optimizing the NICE3000 controller based on a large number of applications and combining new industrial features. The NICE3000 new has the following advantages: 1. It supports high-performance vector control and open-loop low speed running. It can drive both asynchronous motor and permanent magnetic synchronous motor (PMSM), and implement switchover between the two types of motors easily by modifying only one parameter. 2. It supports direct parallel connection of two elevators and supports the CANbus and Modbus communication protocols for remote monitoring, which reduces the required quantity of travling cables. 3. It supports a maximum of 40 floors and is widely applied to elevators used in the residence, ofce buildings, shopping centers, and hospitals. This manual describes the correct use of the NICE3000 new , including product features, safety information and precautions, installation, parameter setting, commissioning, and maintenance & inspection. Read and understand the manual before using the product, and keep it carefully for future maintenance. The personnel who involve in system installation, commissioning, and maintenance must receive necessary safety and use training, understand this manual thoroughly, and have related experience before performing operations. Notes • The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards. Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specied rst, and then perform operations in accordance with the instructions. • The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match the product you purchased. • The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade, specication modication as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of the manual. • Contact our agents or customer service center if you have some questions during the use. Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual - 2 - Introduction 1. Comparison with the NICE3000 The following table lists the comparison between the NICE3000 new and the NICE3000. Item NICE3000 NICE3000 new Maximum number of oors 31 (standard) 40 (standard) Maximum elevator speed 4 m/s 4 m/s I/O terminals 24 inputs, 6 outputs 24 inputs, 6 outputs, 3 high-voltage inputs CANbus 1 x CANbus 2 x CANbus Modbus 1 x Modbus 1 x Modbus Motor driving type Separate control for synchronous and asynchronous motors Integrated control for synchronous and asynchronous motors No-load-cell startup Supporting SIN/COS encoder only Supporting: • Push-pull encoder • Open-collector incremental encoder • UVW encoder • SIN/COS encoder • Endat encoder Control mode • Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) • Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) • Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) • Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) • V/F control LCD operator Not support Support Inside-car commissioning Not support Support NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction - 3 - 2. Connection to peripheral devices NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller Ground AC input reactor Electromagnetic contactor Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) Three-phase AC power supply Braking resistor Noise filter on input side P(+) BR Braking unit + - Motor External operation panel Output reactor Ground Ground MF.K RUN STOP RES QUICK PRG ENTER RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC RPM % A VHz Use within the allowable power supply specification of the controller. Select a proper breaker to resist large in-rush current that flows into the controller at power-on. To guarantee safety, use an electromagnetic contactor. Do not use it to start or stop the controller because such operation reduces the service life of the controller. Suppress the high order harmonic to improve the power factor. Reduce the electromagnetic interference on the input side. Reliably ground the motor and the controller to prevent electric shock. • Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller. Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge suppressor. • Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti- interference lter to minimize the interference. • For more details on peripheral devices, refer to related selection guidelines. Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual - 4 - 3. Function list of the NICE3000 new Common Running Functions Full collective selective In automatic running or attendant state, this function enables the elevator to respond both car calls and hall calls. Passengers at any service oor can call the elevator by pressing the up call button and down call button. Door open holding time setting The system automatically determines different door open time for door open for call, command, protection, or delay according to the set door open holding time. Door open holding In automatic running state, passengers can press the door open button in the car to delay door open to facilitate goods to be moved in/out. Door machine service oor setting You can set the required service oors of the door machines. Door pre-close by the door close button During door open holding in automatic running state, passengers can press the door close button to close the door in advance, which improves the efciency. Floor number display setting The system supports display of oor numbers in combinations of numbers and letters, which meets the requirements of special conditions. Light curtain signal judgment If the door is blocked by stuff during door close, the light curtain acts and the elevator opens the door. This function is invalid in re emergency state. Auxiliary operation box An optional auxiliary operation box that has the same functions as the main operation box is available. Independent control of the front door and back door When there are two doors for a car, automatic control on the two doors depends on your requirements. Repeat door close If the door lock is not applied after the elevator performs door close for a certain time, the elevator automatically opens the door and then closes the door again. Independent command When the main and auxiliary operation boxes are congured, they can independently control door open/close according to the commands in automatic running state. Voice announcement The elevator automatically announces information such as the running direction and next arriving oor during running. Auto-leveling The systems implements automatic accurate leveling based on the oor pulse counting and up/down leveling feedback signals. Response at acceleration The system allows the elevator to automatically respond to calls from the service oors during acceleration. Down collective selective control In automatic running or attendant state, the elevator responds only to hall down calls besides car calls. Idle elevator returning to base oor In automatic running state, the elevator automatically returns to the set parking oor and waits for passengers if there is no car call or hall call within the set time. NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction - 5 - Landing at another oor If the door open time exceeds the door open protection time but the door open limit signal is still inactive, the elevator closes the door and then automatically runs to the next landing oor. The system reports fault Err55. Forced door close When the door fails to close within the set time due to the action of the light curtain or safety edge, the elevator enters the forced door close state, closes the door slowly, and gives a prompt tone. Cancellation of wrong calls Passengers can press the button consecutively twice to cancel wrong calls. Service oor setting You can enable or disable the system service for certain oors exibly based on actual requirements. Time-based oor service You can exibly set the time periods and corresponding service oors or select the service oors by using the service oor switchover switch. Independent running The elevator does not respond to any call, and the door needs to be closed manually. In the case of group control, the elevator runs independently out of the group control system. Attendant running In attendant state, the running of the elevator is controlled by the attendant. Low-speed self- rescue When the elevator is in non-inspection state and stops at non-leveling area, the elevator automatically runs to the leveling area at low speed if the safety requirements are met, and then opens the door. Door control function You can set whether the system keeps outputting commands after door open limit and door close limit based on the type of the door machine. Car arrival gong After the elevator arrives at the destination oor, the CTB gives a prompt tone. Hall arrival forecast indicator When the elevator will arrive at the destination oor soon, the hall arrival forecast indicator becomes ON. Hall arrival gong After the elevator will arrive at the destination oor soon, the system outputs the hall arrival gong. Hall I/O extension function If the hall I/O terminals are not sufcient, more terminals can be provided by using an HCB-B board. Car I/O extension function If the car I/O terminals are not sufcient, more terminals can be provided by using an HCB-B board. Button stuck check The system can automatically identify whether a hall call button is stuck and cancel the stuck call, preventing the condition that the elevator cannot close and run due to stuck hall calls. Automatic startup torque compensation The system automatically implements startup torque compensation based on the current car load, achieving smooth startup and improving the riding comfort. Direct stop The system automatically calculates and generates the running curves based on the distance, enabling the elevator to directly stop at the leveling position without creeping. Automatic generation of optimum curve The system automatically calculates the optimum speed curve compliant with the human-machine function principle based on the distance, without being limited by the number of curves or short oor. Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual - 6 - Service suspension output When the elevator cannot respond to hall calls, the corresponding terminal outputs the service suspension signal. Running times recording In automatic running state, the system automatically records the running times of the elevator. Running time recording The system automatically records the accumulative power-on time, working hours, and working days of the elevator. Automatic door open upon door lock abnormality If the system detects that the door lock circuit is abnormal during door open/close, the elevator automatically opens and closes the door again, and reports a fault after the set door open/close times is reached. VIP service The elevator rst directly runs to the VIP oor and provides services for special persons. Specied elevator preferred The specied elevator is preferred to respond to calls of specied oors. Disability service When the elevator is waiting at the leveling position, if there is a call at this oor from the disability operation box, the door open holding time is prolonged. It is the same for the back door. Full-load direct running When the car is full-loaded in automatic running state, the elevator does not respond to hall calls from the passing oors. These halls calls, however, can still be registered, and will be executed at next time of running (in the case of single elevator) or by another elevator (in the case of group control). Overload protection When the car load exceeds the rated elevator load, the elevator alarms and stops running. Fault data recording The system automatically records detailed information of faults, which helps improve the efciency of maintenance and repair. Inspection-related Functions Simple maintenance keypad The 3-button keypad on the MCB provides the functions such as commissioning the running oors and door open/close. Operation box commissioning The LCD operator can be connected to the system in the car for elevator commissioning, which improves the commissioning efciency. Shaft auto-tuning Shaft auto-tuning is required before rst-time automatic running. During shaft auto-tuning, the elevator runs from the bottom oor to the top oor at the inspection speed and automatically records all position signals in the shaft. User-dened parameter display You can view the parameters that are modied and different from the default setting. Inspection running After entering the inspection state, the system cancels automatic running and related operations. You can press the up or down call button to make the elevator jog at the inspection speed. Motor auto-tuning With simple parameter setting, the system can obtain the motor parameters no matter whether the motor is with-load or without load. Floor position intelligent correction Every time the elevator runs to the terminal oor, the system automatically checks and corrects the car position information based on slow-down switch 1, and eliminates over travel top terminal or bottom terminal with use of the slow-down switches. NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction - 7 - Dual-speed for inspection Considering inaccurate running control at high inspection speed but a long running time at low inspection speed, the system provides the dual-speed curve for inspection, which greatly improves the efciency at inspection. Test running The test running includes the fatigue test of a new elevator, car call oor test, hall call test, and tests such as hall call response forbidden, door open/close forbidden, terminal oor limit switch shielded, and overload signal shielded. Fire Emergency and Security Functions Returning to base oor at re emergency After receiving a re emergency signal, the elevator does not respond to any call but directly runs to the re emergency oor and waits. Fireghter running After the elevator enters the reghter running mode, door open/close is implemented by the jog operation (optional) by using the door open and close buttons rather than automatically. In addition, the elevator responds to only car calls and only one call can be registered once. Security oor After the security oor function is enabled, the security oor is used at 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m, and the elevator runs to the security oor rst every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the destination oor. Elevator lock In automatic running state, when the elevator lock switch acts or the set elevator time is reached, the elevator cancels all registered calls, returns to the elevator lock oor, stops running, and turns off the lamp and fan in the car. Troubleshooting based on fault level Faults are classied into different levels based on the severity. Different levels of faults are rectied using different methods. Runaway prevention The system detects the running state of the elevator in real time. If the elevator speed exceeds the limit, the system immediately stops running of the elevator. Automatic identication of power failure The system automatically identies power failure and outputs the relay signal for emergency evacuation automatic switchover to implement emergency evacuation at power failure. Automatic running mode switchover at power failure For the synchronous motor, when the power supply is interrupted, the system can perform automatic switchover between shorting stator braking mode and controller drive mode, implementing quick and stable self-rescue. Shorting stator braking mode: Upon power failure, UPS is used, the motor stator is shorted, and the brake is automatically released, making the car move slowly under the effect of the weighing difference between the car and the counterweight. Running direction self-identication at power failure When the power supply is interrupted, the system can automatically identify the current car load and determine the running direction. Base oor verication After detecting a position abnormality, the system runs the elevator to each oor until reaching the terminal oor for verication, guaranteeing system security. Introduction NICE3000 new User Manual - 8 - Passenger unloading The system automatically determines the fault level. If the safety running conditions are met, the elevator rst runs to the leveling position to unload passengers. Interference degree judgment The system judges the degree of interference on the communication. Earthquake protection When the earthquake detection device acts and inputs a signal to the system, the elevator lands at the nearest oor and stops running. After the earthquake signal becomes inactive and the fault is reset manually, the elevator restores to normal running. Current cancellation in ramp mode For the PMSM, after the elevator decelerates to stop, the holding current of the motor is cancelled in ramp mode, preventing abnormal noise during current cancellation. Independent working power supply The NICE3000 new system supports not only three-phase 380 VAC but also single-phase 220 VAC to meet different applications of the power supply system (such as 220 V UPS) Automatic voltage identication The system detects the bus voltage and automatically adjusts the running speed of the elevator to adapt to the situation of insufcient power from power supply (such as emergency UPS). Parallel/Group Control and Other Functions Parallel control The system supports parallel control of two elevators and provides multiple scheduling algorithms to meet requirements of different customers. Dispersed waiting In parallel control, the elevators can wait at different oors. Parallel/Group control exit If the parallel/group control exit switch of a certain elevator in a parallel/ group control system is valid or the time for exiting the parallel/group control is reached, the elevator exits parallel/group control and runs independently. This does not affect normal running of the parallel/group control system. Parallel/Group control automatic exit If an elevator in the parallel/group control system cannot respond to calls in time due to faults, the elevator automatically exits the parallel/ group control system and runs independently. This does not affect normal running of the parallel/group control system. Anti-nuisance function The system automatically judges the number of passengers in the car and compares it with the number of registered car calls. If there are excessive car calls, the system determines that it is nuisance and cancels all car calls. In this case, passengers need to register correct car calls again. Prompt of non-door zone stop The system gives a prompt when the elevator stops at a non-door zone area due to faults. Full-load indication When the elevator is full-loaded, a full-load indication is displayed on the HCBs and the elevator directly runs to the desired oors. Interface for intelligent residential management The system provides an interface for intelligent residential management to perform remote monitoring on the state of elevators in the residential district. Parameter copy You can conveniently upload and download parameters of the system by using the LCD operator. NICE3000 new User Manual Introduction - 9 - Energy-saving Functions Car energy-saving If there is no running command within the set time, the system automatically cuts off the power supply to the lamp and fan in the car. Energy-saving running with standby power supply When the normal power supply is interrupted and the emergency power supply is used, the system reduces the running speed of the elevator in the prerequisite of guaranteeing the smooth running curve. Arrival gong disabled at night Within the set time period, the arrival gong is disabled. Energy-saving of idle door machine After the car lamp is turned off, the system does not output the door close command, which reduces power consumption of the door machine. 4. Optional functions Function Description Remark Micro-leveling After landing at a oor, the elevator may move upward or downward due to the load change and the car door is not aligned with the ground, which is inconvenient for in and out of passengers and goods. In this case, the system allows the elevator to run to the leveling position in the door open state at the leveling speed. MCTC-SCB required Power failure emergency evacuation For the elevator congured with UPS, the system uses the UPS to implement low-speed self-rescue in the case of power failure. UPS required Onsite commissioning The system can control and monitor running of elevators by using the NEMS software. NEMS software required Residential monitoring The control system can be connected to the terminal in the monitoring room. By using the NEMS software, you can view the oor position, running direction, and fault state of the elevator. NEMS and accessories required Remote monitoring The control system can be connected to the terminal (such as PC) in the monitoring room. By using the NEMS software, you can view the oor position, running direction, and fault state of the elevator. MCTC-MIB required Door pre-open During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller than 0.2 m/s and the door zone signal is active, the system shorts the door lock by means of the shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs the door open signal, implementing door pre-open. This improves the elevator use efciency. MCTC-SCB required IC card Passengers can use an IC card to go to oors that require authorization. IC card required Operation restoration In case of an incorrect setting, you can restore to parameters of the last operation state. LCD operator required Contents Preface ................................................................................................................ 1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 2 Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions.................................................. 14 1.1 Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................... 14 1.2 General Precautions .................................................................................................... 17 1.3 Protective Functions .................................................................................................... 19 Chapter 2 Product Information .......................................................................... 22 2.1 System Conguration of the NICE3000 new ............................................................ 22 2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description................................................................... 23 2.3 Models and Specications ........................................................................................... 24 2.4 Technical Specications .............................................................................................. 25 2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions ........................................................ 27 2.6 Optional Parts .............................................................................................................. 29 2.7 Selection of Braking Resistor ...................................................................................... 30 Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation ............................................... 34 3.1 NICE3000 new Integrated Elevator Controller ................................................................ 34 3.2 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB) ............................................................................................. 40 3.3 Display Board (MCTC-HCB)........................................................................................ 43 3.4 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB) ............................................................................................ 53 3.5 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card ................................................................... 56 3.6 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices ................................................................... 59 3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000 new Control System ................................... 60 3.8 Installation of Shaft Position Signals ........................................................................... 60 Chapter 4 Use of the NICE3000 new .................................................................... 66 4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad ........................................................................................ 66 4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel ................................................................................. 70 4.3 Use of the LCD Operator ............................................................................................. 73 Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example ............................ 78 5.1 System Commissioning ............................................................................................... 78 5.2 System Application ...................................................................................................... 89 Chapter 6 Function Code Table ....................................................................... 104 6.1 Function Code Description ........................................................................................ 104 6.2 Function Code Groups .............................................................................................. 104 6.3 Function Code Table .................................................................................................. 105 Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes........................................................ 136 Group F0: Basic Parameters ........................................................................................... 136 Group F1: Motor Parameter ............................................................................................ 138 Group F2: Vector Control Parameters ............................................................................. 141 Group F3: Running Control Parameters .......................................................................... 144 Group F4: Floor Parameters............................................................................................ 147 Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters ....................................................................... 148 Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters ............................................................................. 159 Group F7: Test Function Parameters .............................................................................. 171 Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters ..................................................................... 173 Group F9: Time Parameters ............................................................................................ 176 Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters ........................................................................... 177 Group Fb: Door Function Parameter ............................................................................... 188 Group FC: Protection Function Parameters .................................................................... 190 Group Fd: Communication Parameters ........................................................................... 194 Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters ....................................................................... 196 Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters .................................................................... 200 Group FF: Factory Parameters........................................................................................ 201 Group FP: User Parameters ............................................................................................ 201 Chapter 8 EMC ................................................................................................ 204 8.1 Denition of Terms ..................................................................................................... 204 8.2 Introduction to EMC Standard ................................................................................... 204 8.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices........................................................................ 205 8.4 Shielded Cable .......................................................................................................... 208 8.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems ................................................... 211 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 214 9.1 Description of Fault Levels ........................................................................................ 214 9.2 Fault Information and Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 215 1 Safety Information and Precautions Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual - 14 - Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger: • DANGER indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal injury or even death. • WARNING indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in potential risk of severe personal injury or even death. • CAUTION indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in minor or moderate personal injury or equipment damage. In addition, NOTE appearing in other chapters indicates that an unintended result or situation may occur if the notice is not complied with. The notices in this manual you have to observe are aimed at guaranteeing your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to the controller or the parts connected to it. Read this manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding and perform all operations by following the notices in this chapter. Monarch will assume no liability or responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper operation. 1.1 Safety Precautions Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions Warning WARNING • This controller has hazardous high voltage and the controlled motor is a dangerous rotating device. Failure to comply with the notices may result in personal injury or damage to the property. • Transportation, installation, operation and maintenance of the controller can be performed only by qualied personnel after they get familiar with the safety information in this manual. This is the prerequisite of safe and stable running of the equipment. • Do not open the front cover or touch the power terminals on the main circuit within 10 minutes after the controller is powered off. The capacitor on the DC circuit still has residual high voltage even after power-off. Failure to comply will result in electric shock. NICE3000 new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions - 15 - Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions During Installation DANGER • Do not install the equipment if you nd water seepage, component missing or damage upon unpacking. • Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not conform to the product you received. • Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as metal, and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure to comply may result in a re. WARNING • Do not loosen the xed screws of the components, especially the screws with red mark. • Do not install the controller on vibrating parts. Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment or unexpected accidents. CAUTION • Handle the equipment with care during transportation to prevent damage to the equipment. • Do not drop wire end or screw into the controller. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller. • Do not use the equipment with damaged or missing components. Failure to comply will result in personal injury. • Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to comply will result in static electricity damage. • Install the controller in places free of vibration and direct sunlight. At Wiring DANGER • Wiring must be performed only by qualied personnel under instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply may result in unexpected accidents. • A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and the controller. Failure to comply may result in a re. • Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure to comply may result in electric shock. • Tie the controller to ground properly by standard. Failure to comply may result in electric shock. WARNING • Never connect the power cables to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the controller. Pay attention to the marks of the wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller. • Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus terminals (+) and (-). Failure to comply may result in a re. CAUTION • Ensure that the cabling satises the EMC requirements and the regional safety standard. Use wire sizes recommended in the manual. Failure to comply may result in accidents. • Use a shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the shield is reliably grounded at one end. • Use a twisted cable with twisted distance of 20−30 mm as the communication cable, and ensure that the shield is reliably grounded. Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual - 16 - Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions During running DANGER • All peripheral devices must be connected properly according to the circuit wiring instructions provided in this manual. Failure to comply will result in accidents • Cover the controller properly before power-on to prevent electric shock. • Do not open the controller’s cover after power-on. Failure to comply may result in electric shock. • Do not touch the controller and peripheral circuits with wet hand. Failure to comply may result in electric shock. • Do not touch any I/O terminal of the controller. Failure to comply may result in electric shock. • The controller performs safety detection on external strong power circuits automatically at the beginning of power-on. Do not touch the U, V, W terminals of the controller or the motor terminals at the moment. Failure to comply may result in electric shock. • Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal burnt. • Signal detection must be performed only by qualied personnel during operation. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the controller. WARNING • Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor auto-tuning or running. Failure to comply will result in accidents. • Check that the following requirements are met: • The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the controller. • The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W) are properly connected. • No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit. • The wiring is secured. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller. CAUTION • For synchronous motor, ensure that motor auto-tuning is performed successfully. Perform trial running before resuming the steel rope so as to make the motor run properly. • Avoid objects falling into the controller when it is running. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller. • Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the controller because such test has been done in the factory. Failure to comply will result in accidents. • Do not change the default settings of the controller. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller. • Do not start/stop the controller by opening or closing the contactor. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller. Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller. NICE3000 new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions - 17 - Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions During maintenance DANGER • Do not repair or maintain the controller at power-on. Failure to comply will result in electric shock. • Repair or maintain the controller when its voltage is lower than 36 VAC, about two minutes after the controller is powered off. Otherwise, the residual voltage in the capacitor may result in personal injury. • Do not allow unqualied personnel to repair or maintain the controller. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the controller. WARNING • Repair or maintenance of the controller may be performed only by the center authorized by Monarch or qualied personnel. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the controller. • Power supply must be cut off before repair or maintenance of the controller. CAUTION • Set the parameters again after the controller is replaced. All the pluggable components must be plugged or removed only after power-off. • Strictly obey the laws and regulations and repair and maintain the elevator equipment periodically. Only timely troubleshooting can ensure the safety of passengers. Disposal CAUTION The packaging materials, screws and terminal blocks can be re-used and it is suggested that you keep them well for future use. WARNING The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as ordinary industrial waste. 1.2 General Precautions 1. Motor insulation test Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the rst time, or when it is reused after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor insulation of motor windings from damaging the controller. The motor must be disconnected from the controller during the insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is recommended for the test. Ensure that the insulation resistance is not less than 5 MΩ. 2. Thermal protection of the motor If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the controller, especially when the rated power of the controller is greater than that of the motor, adjust the motor protection parameters on the operation panel of the controller or install a thermal relay for the motor circuit for protection. Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual - 18 - 3. Motor heat and noise The output of the controller is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic wave, and therefore, the motor temperature rise, noise, and vibration are slightly greater than those at running with the power frequency (50 Hz). 4. Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor on the output side of the controller The controller outputs PWM waves, and therefore, do not install the capacitor for improving power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor on the output side of the controller. Otherwise, the controller may suffer transient overcurrent or even be damaged. 5. Contactor on the input and output sides of the controller When a contactor is installed between the input side of the controller and the power supply, the controller must not be started or stopped by opening or closing the contactor. When a contactor is installed between the output side of the controller and the motor, do not open or close the contactor when the controller has output. Otherwise, modules inside the controller may be damaged. 6. Use outside the rated voltage The controller must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this manual. Otherwise, components inside the controller may be damaged. If required, use a corresponding voltage step-up or step-down device. 7. Surge suppressor The controller has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge voltage generated when the inductive loads (electromagnetic contactor, electromagnetic relay, solenoid valve, electromagnetic coil and electromagnetic brake) around the controller are switched on or off. If the inductive loads generate very high surge voltage, use a surge suppressor for the inductive load or also use a diode. Note Do not connect the surge suppressor on the output side of the controller. 8. Altitude and de-rating In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air, it is necessary to de-rate the controller. Contact Monarch for technical support. 9. Adaptable motor The controller is adaptable to squirrel-cage asynchronous motor or AC PMSM. Select a proper controller according to motor nameplate. The default parameters configured inside the controller are squirrel-cage asynchronous motor parameters. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default values based on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running effect and protection performance will be affected. For PMSM, motor auto-tuning must be performed. 10. Precautions on selecting residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB) Tripping may be caused if an improper RCCB is selected when the controller drives the motor. This is because the output wave of the controller has high harmonics and the motor NICE3000 new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions - 19 - cable and the cable connecting the controller and the motor produce leakage current, which is much larger than the current when the motor runs at power frequency (50 Hz). Thus, it is necessary to determine the proper RCCB sensitivity based on the general leakage current of the cables and the motor. The leakage current is dependent on the motor capacity, cable length, insulation class and wiring method. Generally, the leakage current on the output side of the controller is three times of the current when the motor runs at power frequency (50 Hz). 1.3 Protective Functions Adopting different protective functions for different levels of faults, the NICE3000 new provides the elevator running system with full abnormality protection. For detailed solutions to the faults, see chapter 8. Faults of the controller are classied as follows: 1. Speed abnormal The controller monitors the encoder feedback speed and output torque. Once the feedback speed exceeds the limit or the deviation between the torque limit and the speed feedback is too large, the controller performs protection immediately, reports an alarm and prohibits running. 2. Drive control abnormal The related faults include drive overcurrent, overvoltage/undervoltage, power input/ output phase loss, overload, and storage abnormality. If such a fault occurs, the controller performs protection immediately, stops output, applies the brake and prohibits running. 3. Encoder abnormal The related faults include encoder phase loss, direction reversing, wire-breaking, and pulse interference. If such a fault occurs, the controller performs protection immediately to avoid unexpected accidents. If pulse interference is large, the controller reports an alarm immediately. If pulse interference is small, the controller performs position correction every time it receives a leveling signal and clears the accumulative error. 4. Leveling sensor abnormal The related faults include sensor failure or sensor stuck. The controller judges whether a fault occurs based on the leveling signal change. If the leveling signal does not change within the set time, the system reports an alarm. 5. Floor data abnormal The system stores the oor information through the shaft auto-tuning. If the oor data is abnormal, the system prompts the fault information at the rst-time running. During actual running, the controller continuously compares position information input by DIs with the stored oor data. If the deviation is large, the system reports an alarm. Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000 new User Manual - 20 - 2 Product Information Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual - 22 - Chapter 2 Product Information 2.1 System Conguration of the NICE3000 new The NICE3000 new series integrated elevator control system combines the functions of both elevator controller and the high-performance vector controller. It mainly includes the integrated elevator controller, car top board (MCTC-CTB), hall call board (MCTC-HCB), car call board (MCTC-CCB), and optional door pre-open module, and remote monitoring system. The following gure shows the system components. Figure 2-1 System components of the NICE3000 new MCTC-CTB MCTC-CCBMCTC-HCB LED operation panel (MDKE) or LCD operator (MDKE3) Load cell MCTC-HCB MCTC-HCB CANbus Modbus Host computer NICE3000 new integrated controller CANbus Communication in parallel mode Synchronous or asynchronous motor 1. It controls the motor based on feedback signals from the encoder, and records information of all position switches in the shaft by pulse, implementing accurate leveling and direct travel ride and guaranteeing running safety. 2. It implements information collection and control of car-related components by means of CANbus communication with the MCTC-CTB. 3. It registers and displays hall calls of all oors with easy address setting by means of Modbus communication with the MCTC-HCB. NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information - 23 - The following gure shows the system structure of the NICE3000 new . Figure 2-2 System structure of the NICE3000 new Braking unit Drive circuit of the motor Power supply circuit Control circuit of the controller MCTC-HCB MCTC-CCB Input power CANbus Modbus MCTC-CTB Modbus MCTC-HCB NICE3000 new integrated controller MCTC-HCB MCTC-HCB M Encoder Motor Encoder feedback U V W 2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description Figure 2-3 Designation rules and nameplate of the NICE3000 new MODEL: NICE-L-C-4015 INPUT: 3PH AC380V 36A 50/60Hz OUTPUT: 3PH AC 0~380V 33A 0~90Hz Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co.Ltd S/N: 010150602803825403 POWER: 15kW Rating namplate Controller model Power class Rated input Rated output Manufacturing SN NICE–L–C–40 15 NICE series integrated elevator controller A Asynchronous motor Mark Motor Type B Synchronous motor C Synchronous /Asynchronous motor integrator L Mark Controller Type Specialized for elevators 20 Single-phase/ Three-phase 220 V Mark Voltage Class 40 Three-phase 380 V 02 2.2 kW Mark 03 3.7 kW ... ... Power Class 30 30 kW 45 45 kW Nameplate position NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller Note that the NICE3000 new has multiple voltage classes and power classes. For details, see the Table 2-1. Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual - 24 - 2.3 Models and Specications Table 2-1 NICE3000 new models and specications Controller Model Power Capacity (kVA) Input Current (A) Output Current (A) Motor Power (kW) Single-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V NICE-L-C-2002 2.3 13.2 5.2 1.1 NICE-L-C-2003 3.4 17 7.5 1.5 220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8 29 10.3 2.2 220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1 36 15.5 3.7 220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9 41 19 4.0 220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3 40 22.5 5.5 220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1 49 27.7 11 220-NICE-L-C-4030 33 61 34.6 15 Three-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V NICE-L-C-2002 4.0 11.0 9.6 2.2 NICE-L-C-2003 5.9 17.0 14.0 3.7 220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0 29.0 18.0 4.0 220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0 36.0 27.0 5.5 220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0 41.0 33.0 7.5 220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0 40.0 39.0 11.0 220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0 49.0 48.0 15.0 220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0 61.0 60.0 18.5 Three-phase 380 V, range: 340−450 V NICE-L-C-4002 4.0 6.5 5.1 2.2 NICE-L-C-4003 5.9 10.5 9.0 3.7 NICE-L-C-4005 8.9 14.8 13.0 5.5 NICE-L-C-4007 11.0 20.5 18.0 7.5 NICE-L-C-4011 17.0 29.0 27.0 11.0 NICE-L-C-4015 21.0 36.0 33.0 15.0 NICE-L-C-4018 24.0 41.0 39.0 18.5 NICE-L-C-4022 30.0 49.5 48.0 22.0 NICE-L-C-4030 40.0 62.0 60.0 30.0 NICE-L-C-4037 57.0 77.0 75.0 37.0 NICE-L-C-4045 69.0 93.0 91.0 45.0 NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 112 55 NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information - 25 - Note 1. In terms of single-phase and three-phase 220 VAC, NICE-L-A/B-2002 and NICE-L-A/B-2003 are specially designed for 220 VAC. The other models that are marked by prexing "220-" are modied from the three-phase 380 VAC models. 2. Same models are available for single-phase 220 VAC and three-phase 220 VAC. Pay attentions to the power class of the adaptable motor during the use. 3. Select the proper controller output current based on the rated motor current. Ensure that the controller output current is equal to or greater than the rated motor current. 4. If you require high voltage or power class, contact Monarch. 2.4 Technical Specications Table 2-2 Technical specications of the NICE3000 new Item Specication Basic specications Maximum frequency 300 Hz Carrier frequency 2–16 kHz, adjusted automatically based on the load features Motor control mode Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control Startup torque 0.5 Hz: 180% (SFVC) 0 Hz: 200% (CLVC) Speed stability accuracy ±0.5% (SFVC) ±0.05% (CLVC) Torque control accuracy ±5% (CLVC) Overload 60s for 150% of the rated current, 1s for 200% of the rated current Motor auto-tuning With-load auto-tuning; no-load auto-tuning Distance control Direct travel ride mode in which the leveling position can be adjusted exibly Acceleration/ Deceleration curve N curves generated automatically Slow-down New reliable slow-down function, automatically identifying the position of the slow-down shelf Shaft auto-tuning 32-bit data, recording the position in the shaft accurately Leveling adjustment Flexible and easy leveling adjustment function Startup torque compensation Load cell startup pre-torque compensation No-load-cell startup pre-torque self-adaption Real-time clock Real-time clock for time-based oor service, peak service and automatic password Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual - 26 - Item Specication Basic specications Test function Easy to implement multiple elevators commissioning functions. Fault protection Solutions to different levels of elevator faults Intelligent management Remote monitoring, user management, and group control adjustment Security check of peripheral devices after power-on Security check of peripheral devices, such as grounding and short circuit, after power-on Status monitor Monitoring the state of feedback signals to ensure that the elevator works properly I/O feature Digital input (DI) 24 x DI Input specication: 24 V, 5 mA 3 heavy-current detection input terminals of safety circuit and door lock circuit Input specication: 95−125 V Analog input (AI) AI (voltage range: –10 V to +10 V) Communication port 2 CANbus communication ports 1 Modbus communication port Output terminal block 6 relay outputs The terminals can be allocated with different functions. Encoder interface Supporting different encoders by using an optional PG card Operation and display LED operation panel 5-digit LED display, querying/modifying most parameters and monitoring the system state Keypad 3-digit LED display, implementing certain commissioning functions LCD operator Querying/modifying all parameters, uploading/ downloading parameters and monitoring various status parameters of the system, including running curves Status monitor Connecting the control system and the host computer, convenient for querying/motoring the system state. Environment Altitude Below 1000 m (de-rated 1% for each 100 m higher) Ambient temperature –10°C to +40°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature is above 40°C) Humidity Maximum relative humidity 95%, non-condensing Vibration Maximum vibration: 5.9 m/s 2 (0.6 g) Storage temperature –20°C to +60°C NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information - 27 - 2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions The following figures show the physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the NICE3000 new . Figure 2-4 Physical appearance of the NICE3000 new Figure 2-5 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000 new A B W H D Φ Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual - 28 - Table 2-3 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000 new Controller Model A (mm) B (mm) H (mm) W (mm) D (mm) Hole Diameter (mm) Gross Weight (kg) Size Single-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V NICE-L-C-2002 150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-C NICE-L-C-2003 220-NICE-L-C-4007 150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-D220-NICE-L-C-4011 220-NICE-L-C-4015 220-NICE-L-C-4018 235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-E220-NICE-L-C-4022 220-NICE-L-C-4030 Three-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V NICE-L-C-2002 150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-C NICE-L-C-2003 220-NICE-L-C-4007 150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-D220-NICE-L-C-4011 220-NICE-L-C-4015 220-NICE-L-C-4018 235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-E220-NICE-L-C-4022 220-NICE-L-C-4030 Three-phase 380 V, range: 340−450 V NICE-L-C-4002 150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-CNICE-L-C-4003 NICE-L-C-4005 NICE-L-C-4007 150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-DNICE-L-C-4011 NICE-L-C-4015 NICE-L-C-4018 235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-ENICE-L-C-4022 NICE-L-C-4030 NICE-L-C-4037 260 580 549 385 265 10 32 SIZE-FNICE-L-C-4045 NICE-L-C-4055 NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information - 29 - 2.6 Optional Parts If any optional part in the following table is required, specify it in your order. Table 2-4 Optional parts of the NICE3000 new Name Model Function Remark External braking unit MDBUN It is provided for the NICE3000 new of 37 kW and above. For details, see section 2.7 "Selection of Braking Resistor". PG card MCTC-PG-A2 It is used to adapt to the push-pull and open-collector incremental encoders. - MCTC-PG-D It is used to adapt to the UVW differential encoder and applied to synchronous motor. It requires 5 V power supply. - MCTC-PG-E It is used to adapt to the SIN/COS encoder. - MCTC-PG-F1 It is used to adapt to the absolute encoder (Heidenhain ECN413/1313) - Car top board (CTB) MCTC-CTB The MCTC-CTB is the car control board of the NICE3000 new . It has 8 DIs, 1 AI and 9 relay outputs (7 as standard conguration). It can communicate with the CCB and HCB simultaneously. - Hall call board (HCB) MCTC-HCB The HCB receives the passenger calls and displays the oor where the elevator is located and the running direction. It can also be used as car display board. A number of HCB models are available. For details, see section 3.3. Car call board (CCB) MCTC-CCB The MCTC-CCB is another interface for passengers to interact with the control system. It mainly collects the car alls and outputs the call indicator state. - External LED operation panel MDKE It is the external LED display and operation panel. It provides the RJ45 interface for connecting to the controller. Hand- held LCD operator MDKE3 It is the external LCD display and operator. You can copy parameters by using this operation panel. Extension cable MDCAB It is a standard 8-core network cable and can be connected to MDKE and MDKE3. The cable length is 3 m in the standard conguration. Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual - 30 - 2.7 Selection of Braking Resistor The NICE3000 new models of 30 kW and below have a built-in braking unit, and you only need to connect an external braking resistor between PB and + terminals. For models above 30 kW, you need to install a braking unit and a braking resistor externally. Select the braking resistor based on the conguration listed in the following table. Table 2-5 Braking resistor selection for the NICE3000 new models Controller Model Power of Adaptable Motor (kW) Max. Resistance (Ω) Min. Resistance (Ω) Power of Braking Resistor (W) Braking Unit Single-phase 220 V NICE-L-C-2002 1.1 145.0 125.0 300 Built-in NICE-L-C-2003 1.5 105.0 90.0 450 220-NICE-L-C-4007 2.2 72.0 63.0 600 220-NICE-L-C-4011 3.7 43.0 37.0 1100 220-NICE-L-C-4015 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200 220-NICE-L-C-4018 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600 220-NICE-L-C-4022 11.0 18.0 16.0 3500 220-NICE-L-C-4030 15.0 13.0 13.0 4500 Three-phase 220 V NICE-L-C-2002 2.2 72.0 65.0 600 Built-in NICE-L-C-2003 3.7 54.0 50.0 1100 220-NICE-L-C-4007 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200 220-NICE-L-C-4011 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600 220-NICE-L-C-4015 7.5 26.0 22.0 2500 220-NICE-L-C-4018 11.0 14.5 13.0 3500 220-NICE-L-C-4022 15.0 13.0 12.5 4500 220-NICE-L-C-4030 18.5 12.5 12.0 5500 Three-phase 380V NICE-L-C-4002 2.2 290 230 600 Built-in NICE-L-C-4003 3.7 170 135 1100 NICE-L-C-4005 5.5 115 90 1600 NICE-L-C-4007 7.5 85 65 2500 NICE-L-C-4011 11 55 43 3500 NICE-L-C-4015 15 43 35 4500 NICE-L-C-4018 18.5 34.0 25 5500 NICE-L-C-4022 22 24 22 6500 NICE-L-C-4030 30 20 16 9000 NICE3000 new User Manual Product Information - 31 - Controller Model Power of Adaptable Motor (kW) Max. Resistance (Ω) Min. Resistance (Ω) Power of Braking Resistor (W) Braking Unit NICE-L-C-4037 37 16.0 13 11000 MDBUN-45-T NICE-L-C-4045 45 14.0 11 13500 MDBUN-60-T NICE-L-C-4055 55 12.0 10 16500 MDBUN-60-T Note 1. The preceding conguration takes the synchronous motor as an example. The asynchronous motor has poor energy transfer efciency, and you can reduce the power of the braking resistor or increase the resistance of the braking resistor. 2. It is recommended that you select the braking resistor closest to the maximum resistance. Product Information NICE3000 new User Manual - 32 - 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 34 - Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation 3.1 NICE3000 new Integrated Elevator Controller 3.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements Item Requirements Ambient temperature -10°C to 50°C Heat dissipation Install the controller on the surface of an incombustible object, and ensure that there is sufcient space around for heat dissipation. Install the controller vertically on the support using screws. Mounting location Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder Vibration Less than 0.6 g 3.1.2 Installation Clearance Requirements The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the power class of the NICE3000 new , as shown in the following gure. Figure 3-1 Clearance around the NICE3000 new for installation B B A A Hot air Cold air 1.1-18.5 kW A ≥ 10 mm B ≥ 100 mm 22-45 kW A ≥ 50 mm B ≥ 100 mm Installation Clearance requirements on the NICE3000 new of different power classes Power Class Clearance Requirements The controller should be installed veritically upward. NICE3000 new The NICE3000 new is installed vertically upward on the support with screws fixed into the four mounting holes, as shown in the following gure. NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 35 - Figure 3-2 Diagram of mounting holes 4-M5x15 bolt 4-M5×15 screw 4-M5x15 washer Fixing backplane NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller 4-M6×15 bolt 4-M6×15 screw 4-M6×15 washer 1.1 kW ≤ P ≤ 15 kW 18.5 kW ≤ P ≤ 45 kW 2.5 Nm With fixing washer Fastening torque 3.5 Nm With fixing washer Fastener The controller is generally installed in the control cabinet of the elevator equipment room. Pay attention to the following points when designing the control cabinet: 1. The temperature inside the cabinet must not rise to 10°C higher than the temperature outside the cabinet. 2. A closed control cabinet must be congured with a fan (or other air cooling device such as air conditioner) to ensure air circulation. 3. The air from the fan must not blow directly to the drive unit because this easily causes dust adhesion and further a fault on the drive unit. 4. A vent must be available at bottom of the control cabinet to form bottom-up air ow, which prevents heat island effect on the surface of components or partial thermal conductivity effect. 5. If the fan cannot meet the cooling requirements, install an air conditioner in the cabinet or in the equipment room. Note that the temperature inside the cabinet must not be too low; otherwise, condensation may occur, causing short-circuit of components. 6. For special environment where the temperature is high but cannot be reduced effectively, de-rate the controller during use. 3.1.3 Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Description ■ Terminal Arrangement The following gure shows terminal arrangement of the NICE3000 new . Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 36 - Figure 3-3 Terminal arrangement of the NICE3000 new CN5 CN12 PRG UP SET J9 J10 COP HOP CAN2 232 CN1 CN9 J5 J1 CN3 CN2 CN7 CN4 J7 NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller J12 ■ Description of Main Circuit Terminals The following gure shows main circuit terminal arrangement. Figure 3-4 Main circuit terminal arrangement R S T PB U V W POWER MOTOR NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 37 - Figure 3-5 Wiring of the main circuit R S T PB U V W POWER MOTOR Three-phase power supply Safety contactor Braking resistor (For models of below 37 kW) Braking unit R S T PB U V W POWER MOTOR Three-phase AC power supply Safety contactor Braking resistor MDBUN Jumper bar (For models of 37 kW and above) Table 3-1 Description of main circuit terminals Terminal Name Description R, S, T Three-phase power input terminals Provide 380 VAC power supply. (+), (-) Positive and negative terminals of DC bus Connect the external braking unit and energy feedback unit for models of 37 kW and above. (+), PB Connecting terminals of braking resistor Connect the braking resistor for models of below 37 kW. U, V, W Controller output terminals Connect the three-phase motor. Grounding terminal Must be grounded. Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 38 - Precautions about wiring of the main circuit terminals are as follows: 1. Select the braking resistor according to the recommended values in the braking resistor selection table. 2. The circuit on the output side must not be short-circuited or grounded. 3. U, V, W cables of the controller must pass through the grounding metal pipe and be laid separately or vertically with the control circuit signal cable. 4. If the motor cable is too long, electrical resonance will be generated due to the impact of distributed capacitance, thus damaging the motor insulation or generating higher leakage current, causing the controller to trip in overcurrent protection. 5. The grounding terminal of the main circuit must be well grounded with a thick and short cable. A multi-strand copper cable above 4 mm 2 special for grounding is recommended, and the grounding resistance must not larger than 4 Ω. The grounding electrode cannot be shared with the power zero line. ■ Description of Control Circuit Terminals Table 3-2 Description of control circuit terminals Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement CN1 X1 to X16 DI • Input voltage range: 10–30 VDC • Input impedance: 4.7 kΩ • Optocoupler isolation • Input current limit: 5 mA Functions set in F5-01 to F5-24 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 CN1 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 M Ai CN9 CN9 X17 to X24 DI Ai/M AI Used for the analog load cell device CN3 24V/ COM External 24 VDC power supply 24 VDC power supply for the entire board CN3 24V COM MOD+ MOD- CAN+ CAN- MOD+/- RS485 differential signal Standard isolated RS485 communication interface, used for hall call and display CAN+/- CANbus differential signal CANbus communication interface, communication with the CTB CN2 X25 to X27/ XCM High-voltage detection terminal Input voltage range: 110 VAC±15% Safety circuit and door lock circuit, function set in F5-37 to F5-39 CN2 X25 X26 X27 XCM NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 39 - Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement CN7 Y1/M1 to Y6/M6 Relay output Normally-open (NO), maximum current and voltage rating: 5 A, 250 VAC Function set in F5-26 to F5- 31 CN7 Y1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y5 M5 Y6 M6 CN4 CAN2+/- CAN2 differential signal CAN2 communication interface, used for group control or parallel control CN4 CAN2+ CAN2- GND CN5 DB9 interface RS232 communication interface Used as the interface for commission software, cell monitoring, RS232/ RS485 parallel control, and software download for the MCB and drive board 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 CN5 CN12 RJ45 interface Operation panel interface Used to connect the LED or LCD operator CN12 J1 Optional grounding terminal for AI. The pins marked with "COM" are connected to the ground. J1 COM J5 Used to connect the terminal resistor for the CANbus communication control board; the pins marked with "ON" are connected to the terminal resistor. J5 ON J7 Grounding terminal of the control board. If it is shorted, the ground of the control board is connected to the ground of the AC drive. J7 J12 Interface for connecting the PG card J12 J9/ J10 Factory reserved. Do not short them randomly. Otherwise, the controller may not be used properly. - Table 3-3 Description of indicators on the MCB Mark Terminal Name Function Description COP CAN1 communication indicator When communication between the MCB and the CTB is normal, this indicator is on (green). HOP Modbus communication indicator When communication between the MCB and the HCB is normal, this indicator is on (green). Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 40 - Mark Terminal Name Function Description CAN2 Group control communication indicator This indicator is steady on (green) when communication for parallel control or group control is normal, and blinks when the running in parallel mode or group mode is normal. 232 Serial communication indicator This indicator is on (green) when communication with the host computer or cell/remote monitoring board is normal. X1 to X24 Input signal indicator This indicator is on when the external input is active. Y1 to Y6 Output signal indicator This indicator is on when the system output is active. 3.2 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB) 3.2.1 Dimensions and Installation The car top board (MCTC-CTB) is the elevator car control board of the NICE3000 new . It consists of 8 DI terminals, 1 AI terminal, and 9 relay output terminals (standard: 7). The following gures show the appearance and structure and installation method of the CTB. Figure 3-6 Appearance and structure of the CTB ON J2 J9 CN2 CN1 CN6 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN10 CN7 CN8 MCTC-CTB 115 125 Φ4.9 A1B1B2B3C2 C1D2 D1 C3 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 CAN RESET D2 D1 DM C3 C3M C2 C1 CM B3 B2 B1 BM AM B A 24V CAN+ CAN- COM 24V MOD+ MOD- COM Ai M 24V X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 P24 P24 152 162 OFF Unit: mm Figure 3-7 Installation method of the CTB (unit: mm) Self-tapping screw 4-Φ4.9x30 Plastic support not lower than 1 cm Fixing backplane MCTC-CTB Self-tapping screws 4-Φ4.9×30 Car top control box MCTC-CTB Plastic support higher than 1 cm NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 41 - 3.2.2 Wiring of CTB Terminals Table 3-4 Wiring description of CTB terminals Mark Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement CN2 +24V/COM External 24 VDC power supply 24 VDC power supply for the entire CTB CN2 24V CAN+ CAN- COM CAN+/CAN- CANbus communication interface Connecting the MCB for CANbus communication CN1 +24V/COM 24 VDC power supply 24 VDC power supply for the HCB CN1 24V MOD+ MOD- COM MOD+/MOD- Modbus communication Connecting the HCB for Modbus communication CN6 Ai-M Load cell signal input 0–10 VDC CN6 Ai M 24V CN3 P24 24 VDC power supply DI common terminal CN3 X 1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 P24 P24 X1 Light curtain 1 DI terminal 1. Photocoupler isolation, unipolarity input 2. Input impedance: 3.3 kΩ Signals of the CTB are active when there is 24 VDC power supply. X2 Light curtain 2 X3 Door open limit 1 X4 Door open limit 2 X5 Door close limit 1 X6 Door close limit 2 X7 Full-load signal (100%) X8 Overload signal (110%) Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 42 - Mark Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement CN4 B1-BM Door open signal 1 Relay output terminal Contact drive capacity: 30 VDC, 1 A CN4 D2 D1 DM C3 C3M C2 C1 CM B3 B2 B1 BM B2-BM Door close signal 1 B3-BM Forced door close 1 C1-CM Door open signal 2 C2-CM Door close signal 2 C3-C3M Forced door close 2 D1-DM Up arrival signal D2-DM Down arrival signal CN5 A-AM (NC contact) B-AM (NO contact) Car fan and lamp control Relay output terminal Contact drive capacity: 250 VAC, 3 A or 30 VDC, 1 A CN5 A B AM CN7/CN8 DB9-pin port for communication with the CCB Connecting the CCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CN7/CN8 CN10 RJ45 interface Connecting the external operation panel CN10 J2 CTB address jumper in parallel control Setting the CTB addresses: Short OFF or do not connect the terminal for a single elevator or the master elevator in parallel control; short ON for the slave elevator in parallel control. J2 ON OFF NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 43 - Mark Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement CAN CANbus communication indicator This indicator blinks when communication between the CTB and the MCB is normal, and is steady on when a communication fault occurs. CAN RESET Reset CANbus communication fault indicator This indicator blinks and the CANbus communication indicator is steady on when a fault occurs during communication between the CTB and the MCB. X1 to X8 DI indicator This indicator is on (green) when the external input is active. X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 A1 to D2 Relay output indicator This indicator is on (green) when the system output is active. B1B2B3 C2 C1 D2 D1 C3 A1 J9 Reserved It is factory reserved. Do not short it randomly. Otherwise, the controller may not be used properly. - Note • To prevent external interference on the communication, you are advised to use the shielded twisted pair as communication cables and lay them parallel. • Connect cables to the terminals according to the terminal marks, and x the cables. 3.3 Display Board (MCTC-HCB) As an important interface between users and the control system, the MCTC-HCB receives hall calls and displays the current oor and running direction for the hall. This board can also be used as car display board. Monarch provides many types of display boards. The following part describes only a few common types. If the types available cannot meet your requirements, you can use a parallel-serial conversion board to make the board provided match your own. For any further requirement, contact Monarch. The common types to be described are listed in the following table. Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 44 - Table 3-5 Common HCB types Name Feature Size (mm) HCB-H Dot-matrix display board (red) 144 x 70 x 18 HCB-R1 Ultrathin dot-matrix display board (red) 144 x 70 x 10 HCB-D2 Ultrathin segment LCD display board (blue background white display) 144 x 70 x 10 HCB-U1 4.3-inch segment LCD display board (blue background white display) 143.5 x 79.2 x 9.4 HCB-V1 6.4-inch segment LCD display board (blue background white display) 131 x 184.6 x 14.2 3.3.1 HCB-H (Dot-Matrix Display Board) The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-H. Figure 3-8 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-H 4- Φ 4.2 56.0 134.0 70.0 144.0 22.9 39.1 34.3 22.9 S1 CN1 JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 UP DOWN MCTC-HCB-H Unit: mm The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-H. Figure 3-9 Installation method of HCB-H 9.9 22.5 Dot-matrix display board HCB-H Self-tapping screw 4- Φ 4.9x30 Plastic support higher than 1 cm NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 45 - The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-H. Table 3-6 Input and output terminals of HCB-H Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring JP1 Interface for the elevator lock switch and up arrival indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. Pins 1 and 4 are output of the up arrival indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Elevator lock switch input Up arrival indicator JP2 Interface for the re emergency switch and down arrival indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. Pins 1 and 4 are output of the down arrival indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Fire emergency switch input Down arrival indicator JP3 Interface for the up call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Up call indicator Up call button JP4 Interface for the down call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Down call indicator Down call button S1 Button for setting the oor address. Hold down the button to adjust the oor address (range 0–56). After you stop pressing, the address number blinks three times and the setting is successful. S1 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 46 - Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring CN1 Modbus communication and power supply terminal Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply. 1 2 3 4 MOD - MOD+ 24V COM 3.3.2 HCB-R1 (Ultrathin Dot-Matrix Display Board) The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1. Figure 3-10 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1 4-Φ3.5 56.0 134.0 144.0 22.8 39.0 CN1 J1 UP DOWN ST XF 70 MCTC-HCB-R1 Unit: mm The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-R1. Figure 3-11 Installation method of HCB-R1 6.7 Ultrathin dot- matrix display board HCB-R1 Self-tapping screw 4-Φ4.9x30 Plastic support higher than 1 cm 10 NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 47 - The following table describes the input and output terminals. Table 3-7 Input and output terminals of HCB-R1 Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring UP Interface for the up call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Up call indicator Up call button DOWN Interface for the down call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Down call indicator Down call button XF/ST Interface for the re emergency and elevator lock switches Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input. 1 2 3 4 Fire emergency input Elevator lock input J1 Terminal for setting the oor address. Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button to set the oor address (range 0–56). After the jumper cap is removed, the address is automatically stored. J1 CN1 Modbus communication and power supply terminal Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply. 1 2 3 4 MOD- MOD+ 24V COM Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 48 - 3.3.3 HCB-D2 (Ultrathin Segment LED Display Board) The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2. Figure 3-12 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2 4-Φ3.5 56.0 134.0 70.0 144.0 76.0 49 CN1 J1 UP DOWN ST XF Unit: mm The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-D2. Figure 3-13 Installation method of HCB-D2 HCB-D2 Self-tapping Screw 4- Φ4.9x30 Plastic support higher than 1 cm 10 NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 49 - The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-D2. Table 3-8 Input and output terminals of HCB-D2 Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring UP Interface for the up call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Up call indicator Up call button DOWN Interface for the down call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Down call indicator Down call button XF/ST Interface for the re emergency and elevator lock switch Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input. 1 2 3 4 Fire emergency input Elevator lock input J1 Terminal for setting the oor address Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button to set the oor address (range 0–56). After the jumper cap is removed, the address is automatically stored. J1 CN1 Modbus communication and power supply terminal Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1 and 4 are for power supply. 1 2 3 4 MOD- MOD + 24V COM Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 50 - 3.3.4 HCB-U1 (4.3-inch Segment LED Display Board) The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1. Figure 3-14 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1 3-5.5 3-4.5 Φ 4.5 143.5 79.2 118.0 60.0 53.0 92.0 Unit: mm The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-U1. Figure 3-15 Installation method of HCB-U1 9.4 15 HCB-U1 Self-tapping screw 4- Φ 4.9x30 Plastic support higher than 1 cm NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 51 - The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-U1. Table 3-9 Input and output terminals of HCB-U1 Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring J1 Interface for the up call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Up call indicator Up call button J2 Interface for the down call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Down call indicator Down call button J3 Interface for the re emergency and elevator lock switches Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input. 1 2 3 4 Fire emergency input Elevator lock input S1 Button for setting the oor address. Hold down the button to adjust the oor address (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, the address number blinks three times, and therefore the setting is successful. S1 CN1 Modbus communication and power supply terminal Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply. 1 2 3 4 MOD- MOD+ 24V COM Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 52 - 3.3.5 HCB-V1 (6.4-inch Segment LED Display Board) The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1. Figure 3-16 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1 184.6 131 160 105 95 135 Φ 4.5 Unit: mm The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-V1. Figure 3-17 Installation method of HCB-V1 17.9 14.2 HCB-V1 Self-tapping screw 4-Φ4.9x30 Plastic support higher than 1 cm NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 53 - The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-V1. Table 3-10 Input and output terminals of HCB-V1 Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring J1 Interface for the up call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Up call indicator Up call button J2 Interface for the down call button and indicator Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA). 1 2 3 4 Down call indicator Down call button J3 Interface for the re emergency and elevator lock switch Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input. 1 2 3 4 Fire emergency input Elevator lock input S1 Button for setting the oor address. Hold down the button to adjust the oor address (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, the address number blinks three times, and therefore the setting is successful. S1 CN1 Modbus communication and power supply terminal Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply. 1 2 3 4 MOD- MOD+ 24V COM 3.4 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB) The car call board (MCTC-CCB) is another interface between users and the control system. Each CCB comprises 24 inputs and 22 outputs, including 16 oor buttons and 8 functional signals. The CCB mainly collects button calls and outputs signals of the button call indicators. The need for 31-oor use can be implemented through cascaded connection. CN2 is an input connector and CN1 is a cascaded output connector. The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of MCTC-CCB. Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 54 - Figure 3-18 Appearance and dimensions of MCTC-CCB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12 JP13 JP14 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20 JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24 CN1 Buzzer Floor 1 Floor 2 Floor 3 Floor 4 Floor 5 Floor 6 Floor 7 Floor 8 Floor 9 Floor 10 Floor 11 Floor 12 Floor 13 Floor 14 Floor 15 Floor 16 Attendant Direction change Independent running Fire emergency Door open Door close Door open delay Bypass 79 mm 69 mm 158 mm 148 mm MCTC-CCB CN2 R2.5 The following gure shows the installation method of MCTC-CCB. Figure 3-19 Installation method of MCTC-CCB MCTC-CCB Self-tapping screw 4-Φ4.9x30 Plastic support higher than 1 cm NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 55 - The following table describes the input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB. Table 3-11 Input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB No. Interface Pins 2 and 3 Pins 1 and 4 Remarks 1 JP1 Floor 1 button input Floor 1 display output 1 2 3 4 Floor button indicator Floor button For CCB2, the input signal of JPn corresponds to oor (16+n) button input. 2 JP2 Floor 2 button input Floor 2 display output 3 JP3 Floor 3 button input Floor 3 display output 4 JP4 Floor 4 button input Floor 4 display output 5 JP5 Floor 5 button input Floor 5 display output 6 JP6 Floor 6 button input Floor 6 display output 7 JP7 Floor 7 button input Floor 7 display output 8 JP8 Floor 8 button input Floor 8 display output 9 JP9 Floor 9 button input Floor 9 display output 10 JP10 Floor 10 button input Floor 10 display output 11 JP11 Floor 11 button input Floor 11 display output 12 JP12 Floor 12 button input Floor 12 display output 13 JP13 Floor 13 button input Floor 13 display output 14 JP14 Floor 14 button input Floor 14 display output 15 JP15 Floor 15 button input Floor 15 display output 16 JP16 Floor 16 button input Floor 16 display output 17 JP17 Door open button input Door open display output Invalid for CCB 2. 18 JP18 Door close button input Door close display output 19 JP19 Door open delay button input Door open delay display output 20 JP20 Bypass input Bypass display output 21 JP21 Attendant input Reserved 22 JP22 Direction change input Reserved 23 JP23 Independent running input Reserved 24 JP24 Fireghter input Reserved Note: Pins 1 and 2 are positive of power supply. The pin with white dot mark or that is rectangular is pin 1. Note • Perform wiring strictly according to the terminal marks and ensure that the button is inserted securely. • Because the MCTC-CCB has the same interface, do not make wrong connection when connecting multiple boards in series. Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 56 - 3.5 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card The NICE3000 new can implement CLVC only with use of the MCTC-PG card. The following figures show the appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller. Directly insert the J1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card into the J12 terminal of the controller. Figure 3-20 Appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller PRG UP SET NICE3000 new series integrated elevator controller J12 J1 MCTC-PG card CN1 3.5.1 Selection of the MCTC-PG Card Monarch provides four PG card models, MCTC-PG-A2, MCTC-PG-D, MCTC-PG-E and MCTC-PG-F1 for different encoder types, as described in the following table. Table 3-12 Selection of the MCTC-PG card models Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance and Dimension • Push-pull encoder • open-collector incremental encoder MCTC-PG-A2 12 V PGM PGA PGB MCTC-PG-A2 J1 J2 UVW encoder MCTC-PG-D J1 MCTC-PG-D CN1 D2 D5 D8 D11 D14 M AI CN2 NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 57 - Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance and Dimension SIN/COS encoder MCTC-PG-E J1 MCTC-PG-E CN1 Absolute encoder (ECN413/1313) MCTC-PG-F1 J1 MCTC-PG-F1 CN1 3.5.2 Terminal Wiring and Description of the MCTC-PG Card The MCTC-PG card is connected to the controller and the encoder as follows: The J1 terminal and CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card are respectively connected to the J12 terminal of the MCB on the controller and the encoder of the motor. Different MCTC-PG card models are connected to the MCB in the same way. The connection method to the encoder depends on the CN1 terminal of the model. The following gure shows the wiring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller. Figure 3-21 Wring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller ON J2 J9 CN2 CN1 CN6 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN10 CN7 CN8 MCTC-CTB 115 125 Φ4.9 A1B1B2B3C2 C1D2 D1 C3 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 CAN RESET D2 D1 DM C3 C3M C2 C1 CM B3 B2 B1 BM AM B A 24V CAN+ CAN- CO M 24V MOD+ MOD- CO M Ai M 24V X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 P24 P24 152 162 OFF Unit: mm The following table denes the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models. Table 3-13 Denitions of the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models MCTC-PG-A2 MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1 1 12V 1 A+ 6 NC 11 W+ 1 B- 6 A- 11 C- 1 DT+ 6 GND 11 B+ 2 PGM 2 A- 7 U+ 12 W- 2 NC 7 COM 12 D+ 2 DT- 7 U5V 12 B- 3 PGA 3 B+ 8 U- 13 VCC 3 Z+ 8 B+ 13 D- 3 CK+ 8 GND 13 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 58 - MCTC-PG-A2 MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1 4 PGB 4 B- 9 V+ 14 COM 4 Z- 9 VCC 14 NC 4 CK- 9 A+ 14 5 NC 10 V- 15 NC 5 A+ 10 C+ 15 NC 5 5V 10 A- 15 12V PGM PGA PGB CN1 1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 6 7 8 13 14 15 CN1 1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 6 7 8 13 14 15 CN1 1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 6 7 8 13 14 15 CN1 3.5.3 Precautions on Connecting the MCTC-PG Card 1. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be separated from the cables of the control circuit and the power circuit. Parallel cabling in close distance is forbidden. 2. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be a shielded cable. The shield must be connected to the PE on the controller side. To minimize interference, single-end grounding is suggested. 3. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must run through the duct separately and the metal shell is reliably grounded. 3.5.4 Selection of Adaptable Motor The main counters of the electrical relationship between the controller and the motor are voltage and current. 1. In general elevator applications, the input mains voltage is 380 V, and the motor voltage can only be equal to or smaller than 380 V. Thus, when selecting the NICE3000 new , you can take only the current of the motor into consideration. 2. When the NICE3000 new is designed, large safety allowance is reserved for the main power module. The controller can run properly within 1.1 times of the nominal output current. During stable running, the maximum output torque is 150% of the rated torque and can reach up to 200% of the rated torque for a short time. Therefore, for the motor with the rated voltage of 380 V, you can select the controller of the same power class. As long as the rated current of the motor is smaller than 1.1 times of the output current of the controller, the controller of the same power class can also be used. Generally speaking, when selecting an adaptable motor, ensure that the rated current of the motor is equal to or smaller than the output current of the controller. For technical specications of the controller, see section 2.3. NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 59 - 3.6 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices 3.6.1 Description of Peripheral Electrical Devices 1. Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller. Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge suppressor. 2. Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti- interference lter to minimize the interference. 3. Select the peripheral devices based on actual applications as well as by referring to section 3.6.2. The following table describes the peripheral electrical devices. Table 3-14 Description of peripheral electrical devices Part Mounting Location Function Description MCCB Forefront of controller power input side Cut off the power supply of the controller and provide short-circuit protection. Safety contactor Between MCCB and the controller input side Apply/Cut off the power supply of the controller. The close/open of the contactor is controlled by the external safety circuit. AC input reactor Controller input side Improve the power factor of the input side. Eliminate the higher harmonics on the input side to provide effective protection on the rectier bridge. Eliminate the input current unbalance due to unbalance between the power phases. AC output reactor Between the controller output side and the motor, close to the controller If the distance between the controller and the motor is greater than 100 m, install an AC output reactor. 3.6.1 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices Proper cable specification and cabling greatly improves anti-interference capability and safety of the system, facilitating installation and commissioning and enhancing system running stability. The following table describes the specications of peripheral electrical devices for selection. Table 3-15 Specication of peripheral electrical devices for selection Controller Model MCCB (A) Contactor (A) Cable of Main Circuit (mm²) Cable of Control Circuit (mm²) Grounding Cable (mm²) NICE-2002 16 18 2.5 0.75 2.5 NICE-2003 25 25 2.5 0.75 2.5 NICE-4002 10 12 2.5 0.75 2.5 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 60 - Controller Model MCCB (A) Contactor (A) Cable of Main Circuit (mm²) Cable of Control Circuit (mm²) Grounding Cable (mm²) NICE-4003 16 18 2.5 0.75 2.5 NICE-4005 20 25 2.5 0.75 2.5 NICE -4007 25 25 4 0.75 4 NICE -4011 32 32 4 0.75 4 NICE-4015 40 40 6 0.75 6 NICE-4018 50 50 10 1 10 NICE-4022 50 50 10 1 10 NICE-4030 65 65 16 1 16 NICE-4037 80 80 25 1 16 NICE-4045 100 115 35 1 16 NICE-4055 125 125 50 1 25 Note To prevent the strong power from interfering with the weak power, the strong-power cables must be separated from the weak-power cables during cabling in the shaft. Grounding cables must be used to separate strong-power and weak-power traveling cables. "Strong power" refers to the voltage of 36 V and above. 3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000 new Control System Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000 new control system See the last page of this chapter. 3.8 Installation of Shaft Position Signals In elevator control, to implement landing accurately and running safely, car position needs to be identied based on shaft position signals. These shaft position signals include the leveling switches, up/down slow-down switches, up/ down limit switches, and up/down nal limit switches. These shaft position signals are directly transmitted by the shaft cables to the MCB of the controller. For the electrical wiring method, refer to Figure 3-22. The following gure shows the arrangement of shaft position signals in the shaft. NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 61 - Figure 3-23 Arrangement of shaft position signals Leveling flag (floor N) L 80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm 150 mm L > 2 x F3-08 V² Top leveling position D L L > 2 x F3-08 V² 150 mm Up final limit switch Up limit switch 30-50 mm (V: Rated elevator speed) Up slow-down switch Down slow-down switch Bottom leveling position (V: Rated elevator speed) Down limit switch Down final limit switch 30─50 mm Leveling flag (floor N) L 80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm 150 mm L > 2 x F3-08 V² Top leveling position D L L > 2 x F3-08 V² 150 mm Up final limit switch Up limit switch 30-50 mm (V: Rated elevator speed) Up slow-down switch Down slow-down switch Bottom leveling position (V: Rated elevator speed) Down limit switch Down final limit switch 30─50 mm 3.8.1 Installation of Leveling Signals Leveling signals comprise the leveling switch and leveling plate and is directly connected to the input terminal of the controller. It is used to enable the car to land at each floor accurately. The leveling switches are generally installed on the top of the car. The NICE3000 new system supports the installation of 1−3 leveling switches. The leveling plate is installed on the guide rail in the shaft. A leveling plate needs to be installed at each floor. Ensure that leveling plates at all oors are mounted with the same depth and verticality. The following gure shows the installation of leveling signals Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 62 - Figure 3-24 Installation of leveling signals Car Door zone signal detection Down leveling signal detection Up leveling signal detection Leveling flag Leveling switch The following table describes the installation requirements of leveling switches Table 3-16 Installation requirements of leveling switches Number of Leveling Switches Installation Method Connecting to Input Terminals of Controller Setting of Function Code 1 Door zone signal detection X1 X2 X3 +24 VDC Door zone signal F5-01 = 0 F5-02 = 35 (NC) F5-03 = 0 X1 X 2 X3 +24 VDC Door zone signal F5-01 = 0 F5-02 = 03 (NO) F5-03 = 0 2 Up leveling signal detection Down leveling signal detection X1 X2 X3 +24 VDC Up leveling Down leveling F5-01 = 33 (NC) F5-02 = 0 F5-03 = 34 (NC) Down leveling Up leveling X1 X2 X3 +24 VDC F5-01 = 01 (NO) F5-02 = 0 F5-03 = 02 (NO) NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation - 63 - Number of Leveling Switches Installation Method Connecting to Input Terminals of Controller Setting of Function Code 3 Door zone signal detection Up leveling signal detection Down leveling signal detection Up leveling X1 X 2 X3 +24 VDC Door zone signal Down leveling F5-01 = 33 (NC) F5-02 = 35 (NC) F5-03 = 34 (NC) Down leveling Up leveling X1 X2 X3 +24 VDC Door zone signal F5-01 = 01 (NO) F5-02 = 03 (NO) F5-03 = 02 (NO) Note • When installing leveling plates, ensure that plates at all oors are mounted with the same depth and verticality. Otherwise, the leveling accuracy will be affected. The recommended length of the ag is 80–200 mm. • More leveling input signals need to be added if the door pre-open function is used. In this case, you need to increase the length of the plate properly. For details on the door pre-open module, contact Monarch or local agent. 3.8.2 Installation of Slow-Down Switches The slow-down switch is one of the key protective components of the NICE3000 new , protecting the elevator from over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal at maximum speed when the elevator position becomes abnormal. The NICE3000 new system supports a maximum of three pairs of slow-down switches. The slow-down switch 1, slow-down switch 2 and slow-down switch 3 are installed from the two ends of the shaft to the middle oor one by one. Generally, only one pair of slow-down switches is required for the low-speed elevator. Two or three pairs of slow-down switches are required for the high-speed elevator. The slow-down distance L indicates the distance from the slow-down switch to the leveling plate at the terminal oor. The calculating formula is as follows: L > 2 x F3-08 V² In the formula, L indicates the slow-down distance, V indicates the F0-04 (Rated elevator speed), and F3-08 indicates the special deceleration rate. The default value of F3-08 (Special deceleration rate) is 0.9 m/s 2 . The slow-down distances calculated based on different rated elevator speeds are listed in the following table: Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000 new User Manual - 64 - Table 3-17 Slow-down distances based on different rated elevator speeds Rated Elevator Speed V ≤ 1.5 m/s 1.5 m/s < V ≤ 2.4 m/s 2.4 m/s < V ≤ 3.7 m/s Distance of slow-down 1 1.3 m to H/2 1.3 m 1.3 m Distance of slow-down 2 - 3.2 m 3.2 m Distance of slow-down 3 - - 8.0 m Note • "H" in the table indicates the landing height. The slow-down 1 will reset the terminal oor display, and the slow-down 1 switch needs to be installed within H/2. • The slow-down distances above are calculated on the basis of the default values (special deceleration rate 0.9 m/s 2 , and acceleration rate and deceleration rate 0.6 m/s 2 ). • Increasing the acceleration rate and deceleration rate or reducing the special deceleration rate may bring safety hazard. If any change is need, re-calculate the slow-down distance by using the above formula. 3.8.3 Installation of Limit Switches The up limit switch and down limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/ bottom terminal when the elevator does not stop at the leveling position of the terminal oor. • The up limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the top leveling position. The limit switch acts when the car continues to run upward 30−50 mm from the top leveling position. • The down limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the bottom leveling position. The limit switch acts when the car continues to run downward 30−50 mm from the bottom leveling position. 3.8.4 Installation of Final Limit Switches The nal limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom terminal when the elevator does not stop completely upon passing the up/down limit switch. • The up nal limit switch is mounted above the up limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away from the top leveling position. • The down nal limit switch is mounted below the down limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away from the bottom leveling position. NICE3000 new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000new control system Up slow-down switch 1 Down leveling RUN contactor feedback Safety circuit feedback Door lock circuit feedback Brake contactor feedback Up leveling Inspection signal Inspection up Inspection down Up limit Down limit NICE3000 new CN1 CN9 CN3 CN2 CN7 CN4 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 M Ai X25 X26 X27 XCOM Y1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y5 M5 Y6 M6 CAN2+ CAN2- GND CN5 R S T Three-phase AC power supply Safety contactor M PRG UP SET Braking resistor + – PB U V W J12 Encoder Motor CN1 CN3 CN10 MCTC-CTB 24V MOD+ MOD- COM MCTC-CCBMCTC-CCB CN8 CN7 CN2 CN2 CN1 CN1 Cascaded connection 24V COM CAN+ CAN- MOD+ MOD- CN2 24 V CAN+ CAN- COM D2 D1 DM C3 C3M C2 C1 CM B3 B2 B1 BM MCTC-HCB Car display 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 24V COM MOD+ MOD- MCTC-HCB 24V COM MOD+ MOD- MF.K RUN STOP RES QUICK PRG ENTER RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC RPM % A VHz CN12 +24 VDC Down slow-down switch 1 Up slow-down switch 2 Down slow-down switch 2 Up slow-down switch 3 Down slow-down switch 3 Analog load cell signal Inspection circuit Inspection signal Inspection 1 Inspection down X9 X10 X11 +24 VDC Inspection 1 common Up Down Inspection up Door 2 light curtain Door 2 open limit Overload signal Door 1 open limit Door 1 close limit Full-load signal Door 2 close limit Door 1 light curtain USB 24V 0V A B M C T C - C H M ( v o i c e a n n o u n c e m e n t ) CN4 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 P24 P24 J1 J2 J3 Arrival gong Control of front door machine CN1 MCTC-HCB CN1 A B AM CN5 Car lamp/fan control CN6 Wiring for an analog load cell device Top floor Bottom floor MCTC-PG PG card Braking mechanism Shield K1 K2 K1 K2 Note: The cables for connecting the MCTC-CCB are provided by Monarch and the model is MCTC-CCL. Specify it in your order. Traveling cable Door zone Control of back door machine Inspection 2 Up Down Inspection circuit 24V Ai M Hall operation box Car Note: The functions of I/O terminals of the controller are set in group F5. The wiring in this figure uses the default setting. 4 Use of the NICE3000 new Use of the NICE3000 new NICE3000 new User Manual - 66 - Chapter 4 Use of the NICE3000 new The NICE3000 new supports four commissioning tools, 3-button keypad on the MCB, LED operation panel, LCD operator, and host computer monitoring software. Tool Function Description Remark Onboard 3-button keypad It is used to enter the shaft commissioning commands and view oor information. Standard LED operation panel It is used to view and modify parameters related to elevator drive and control. Optional LCD operator It is used to view parameters related to elevator drive and control in diagram and text, and modify and copy these parameters. Optional Host computer monitoring software It is used to monitor the current elevator state, view and modify all parameters, and upload and download parameters on the PC. Optional The following part describes the commonly used keypad, LED operation panel, and LCD operator in detail. 4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad The onboard keypad consists of three 7-segment LEDs and three buttons. You can view information about the controller and enter simple commands on the keypad. Note The keypad is exposed, and pay attentions to the following points during use: 1. Wear insulated gloves when performing operations on the keypad to prevent electric shock or damage to the controller components due to electrostatic discharge. 2. Do not use a metal or sharp tool to press the button to prevent the short-circuit fault or damage to the components on the MCB. The following gure shows the appearance of the keypad. Figure 4-1 Appearance of the keypad PRG UP SET 3 2 1 A B C DP D E F G As shown in the preceding gure, the three buttons are PRG, UP, and SET. The functions of the three buttons are as follows: • PRG: Press this button in any state to display the current function group number. You can press the UP button to change the function group number. NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the NICE3000 new - 67 - • UP: Press this button to increase the function group number. Currently, the MCB denes a total of 13 function code groups, namely, F0 to F9, and FA to FC. You can press the UP button to display them in turn. In addition, in special function code group menu, you can input simple references by using the UP button. • SET: In the function code group menu, press this button to enter the menu of the function code group. In special function code group menu, after you input a simple reference and press this button to save the setting, the display will return to the F0 menu by default. The following gure shows the setting of increasing the called oor to 5. Figure 4-2 Setting the called oor 05 F0 04 (Select the function code group) (Set the parameter value) Level-I menu Level-II menu PRG Without saving SET Saving When there is a blinking digit, press the UP button to modify it. 01 SET Enter Current floor UP Increase (default display) F1 PRG Switch UP Increase The function code groups displayed on the keypad are described as follows: 1. F0: display of oor and running direction The F0 menu is displayed on the keypad by default upon power-on. The rst 7-segment LED indicates the running direction, while the last two 7-segment LEDs indicate the current oor number of the elevator. When the elevator stops, the rst 7-segment LED has no display. When the elevator runs, the rst 7-segment LED blinks to indicate the running direction. When a system fault occurs, the 7-segment LEDs automatically display the fault code and blink. If the fault is reset automatically, the F0 menu is displayed. 2. F1: command input of the running oor After you enter the F1 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the bottom oor (F6-01). You can press the UP button to set the destination oor within the range of lowest to top and then press the SET button to save the setting. The elevator runs to the destination oor, and the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu at the same time. 3. F2: fault reset and fault code display After you enter the F2 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can press the UP button to change the setting to 1 or 2. ־ Display "1": If you select this value and press the SET button, the system fault is reset. Then, the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu. ־ Display "2": If you select this value and press the SET button, the 7-segment LEDs display the 11 fault codes and occurrence time circularly. You can press the PRG button to exit. Use of the NICE3000 new NICE3000 new User Manual - 68 - 4. F3: time display After you enter the F3 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the current system time circularly. 5. F4: contract number display After you enter the F4 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the user’s contract number. 6. F5: running times display After you enter the F5 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the elevator running times circularly. 7. F6: door open/close control After you enter the F6 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "1-1", and the UP and SET buttons respectively stand for the door open button and door close button. You can press the PRG button to exit. 8. F7: shaft auto-tuning command input After you enter the F7 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can select 0 or 1 here, where "1" indicates the shaft auto-tuning command available. After you select "1" and press the SET button, shaft auto-tuning is implemented if the conditions are met. Meanwhile, the display switches over to the F0 menu. After shaft auto-tuning is complete, F7 is back to "0" automatically. If shaft auto-tuning conditions are not met, fault code "Err35" is displayed. 9. F8: test function After you enter the F8 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting range of F8 is 1–4, described as follows: ־ 1: Hall call forbidden ־ 2: Door open forbidden ־ 3: Overload forbidden ־ 4: Limit switches disabled After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display "Err88" and blink, prompting that the elevator is being tested. When you press PRG to exit, F8 is back to 0 automatically. 10. F9: reserved 11. FA: auto-tuning After you enter the FA menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting range of FA is 1 and 2, as follows: ־ 1: With-load auto-tuning ־ 2: No-load auto-tuning After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display "TUNE", and the elevator enters the auto-tuning state. After conrming that the elevator meets the safe running conditions, press the SET button again to start auto-tuning. NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the NICE3000 new - 69 - After auto-tuning is complete, the 7-segment LEDs display the current angle for 2s, and then switch over to the F0 menu. You can press the PRG button to exit the auto-tuning state. 12. FB: CTB state display After you enter the FB menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the input/output state of the CTB. The following table describes the meaning of each segment of the LEDs. Table 4-1 Input/Output state of the CTB LED No. Segment Mark Meaning of Segment Meaning of ON Diagram 1 A Light curtain 1 Light curtain 1 input active A B C DP D E F G B Light curtain 2 Light curtain 2 input active C Door open limit 1 Door open limit 1 input active D Door open limit 2 Door open limit 2 input active E Door close limit 1 Door close limit 1 input active F Door close limit 2 Door close limit 2 input active G Full-load Full-load input active DP Overload Overload input active 2 A Light-load Light-load signal active 3 A Door open 1 Door open 1 relay output B Door close 1 Door close 1 relay output C Forced door close 1 Forced door close 1 relay output D Door open 2 Door open 2 relay output E Door close 2 Door close 2 relay output F Forced door close 2 Forced door close 2 relay output G Up arrival gong Up arrival gong relay output DP Down arrival gong Down arrival gong relay output 13. FC: elevator direction change (same as the function of F2-10) ־ 0: Running direction and position pulse direction unchanged ־ 1: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction reversed ־ 2: Running direction unchanged, position pulse direction reversed ־ 3: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction unchanged Use of the NICE3000 new NICE3000 new User Manual - 70 - 4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel The LED operation panel is connected to the RJ45 interface of the controller by using an 8-core at cable. You can modify the parameters, monitor the working status and start or stop the controller by operating the operation panel. The following gure shows the LED operation panel. Figure 4-3 Diagram of the LED operation panel MF.K RUN STOP RES QUICK PRG ENTER RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC RPM % A VHz Data display Programming key Function indicator RUN key Fault hiding key Stop/Reset key Shift key Increment key Decrement key Confirm key Unit indicator Menu key 4.2.1 Description of Indicators ■ RUN ON indicates that the controller is in the running state, and OFF indicates that the controller is in the stop state. ■ LOCAL/REMOT Reserved. ■ FWD/REV ON indicates up direction of the elevator, and OFF indicates down direction of the elevator. ■ TUNE/TC ON indicates the auto-tuning state. ■ Unit Indicators means that the indicator is ON, and means that the indicator is OFF. Hz A V RPM % Hz: unit of frequency Hz A V RPM % A: unit of current NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the NICE3000 new - 71 - Hz A V RPM % V: unit of voltage Hz A V RPM % RPM: unit of rotational speed Hz A V RPM % %: percentage 4.2.2 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel Table 4-2 Description of keys on the operation panel Key Name Function PRG Programming Enter or exit Level-I menu. ENTER Conrm Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and conrm the parameter setting. Increment Increase data or function code. Decrement Decrease data or function code. Shift Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or running state, and select the digit to be modied when modifying parameters. RUN Run Start the controller in the operation panel control mode. STOP RES Stop/Reset Stop the controller when it is in the running state and perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state. MF.K Fault hiding Press this key to display or hide the fault information in the fault state, which facilitates parameter viewing. QUICK Quick Enter or exit Level-I quick menu. 4.2.3 Operation Procedure The LED operation panel adopts three-level menu. The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and function code setting value (level III), as shown in the following gure. Use of the NICE3000 new NICE3000 new User Manual - 72 - Figure 4-4 Operation procedure on the operation panel F0 F0.06 50.00 (Select the function code group) (Select the function code) (Set the value of the function code) Level-I menu Level-II menu Level-III menu PRG PRG Not to save the setting ENTER To save the setting ENTER 0.000 ENTER Status parameter PRG F0.07 ENTER PRG Next function code (default display) If there is a blinking digit, press / / to modify the digit. You can return to Level II menu from Level III menu by pressing PRG or ENTER . The difference between the two is as follows: • After you press ENTER , the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code. • After you press PRG , the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly returns to Level II menu and remains at the current function code. The following gure shows the shift between the three levels of menus. Figure 4-5 Shift between the three levels of menus FD …FX-00 PRG ENTER FE FP F0 F1 F2 F3 FE-00 FE-56 FP-02 F0-07 F1-25 F2-18 F3-21 FP-00 F0-00 F1-00 F2-00 F3-00 FD-00 FD-26 In Level III menu, if the parameter has no blinking digit, it means that the parameter cannot be modied. This may be because: • Such a parameter is only readable, such as actually detected parameters and running record parameters. • Such a parameter cannot be modied in the running state and can only be changed at stop. NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the NICE3000 new - 73 - 4.2.4 Viewing Status Parameters In the stop or running state, the operation panel can display multiple status parameters. Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the equivalent binary bits converted from the values of FA-01 and FA-02. In the stop state, a total of 12 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing . You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-02 (each of the binary bits converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter). Figure 4-6 Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state B u s v o l t a g e I n p u t t e r m i n a l l o w b i t s I n p u t t e r m i n a l h i g h b i t s O u t p u t f u n c t i o n C u r r e n t f l o o r C u r r e n t p o s i t i o n C a r l o a d S l o w - d o w n d i s t a n c e a t r a t e d s p e e d C T B o u t p u t s t a t u s S y s t e m s t a t u s R a t e d s p e e d C T B i n p u t s t a t u s Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state In the running state, a total of 16 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing . You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-01 (each of the binary bits converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter). Figure 4-7 Shift between parameters displayed in the running state R a t e d s p e e d B u s v o l t a g e O u t p u t v o l t a g e O u t p u t c u r r e n t O u t p u t f r e q u e n c y I n p u t t e r m i n a l l o w b i t s I n p u t t e r m i n a l h i g h b i t s O u t p u t f u n c t i o n C u r r e n t p o s i t i o n C a r l o a d R u n n i n g s p e e d C u r r e n t f l o o r Shift between parameters displayed in the running state C T B i n p u t s t a t u s P r e - t o r q u e c u r r e n t S y s t e m s t a t u s C T B o u t p u t s t a t u s For details, see the description of corresponding parameters in Chapter 7. 4.3 Use of the LCD Operator The LCD operator is a commissioning tool specially designed for the NICE3000 new , and is connected to the RJ45 interface of the NICE3000 new by using an 8-core at cable. The LCD operator provides functions such as parameter modication, parameter copy, curve display, port monitoring, error help, and call display, which facilitates monitoring on all system states. It is portal and can display various information, making commissioning of the elevator more convenient. The following gure shows the appearance of the LCD operator. Use of the NICE3000 new NICE3000 new User Manual - 74 - Figure 4-8 Appearance of the LCD operator Knob/Confirm key Left key Run key Programming key Display Right key Stop key 4.3.1 Keys on the LCD operator Key Name Function Left Press this key to implement the function displayed on the lower left corner of the display. Right Press this key to implement the function displayed on the lower right corner of the display. Knob/Conrm It has both the knob function and conrm key function. You can rotate the knob to increase or decrease the function code or data, and press the conrm key to execute the operation or move the cursor. Run Press this key to start the controller in operation panel control mode. Stop In operation panel control mode, press this key to stop the running in the running state and reset the fault in the fault state. PRG Programming Press this key to return to the upper level menu. 4.3.2 Description of the Display The following figure shows the structure of the display on the LCD operator (with the monitoring interface as an example). Figure 4-9 Structure of the display 1 Set speed: 0.534 m/s 3 Bus voltage: 220.3 V 2 Rated speed: 1.600 m/s Menu Normal 01 Function indication bar, indicating the function of the key Main display area, indicating the required information Status bar, indicatinging the real- time elevator status Err31 NICE3000 new User Manual Use of the NICE3000 new - 75 - The display of the LCD operator is divided into the following three areas: • Status bar It displays the current state information of the elevator, such as running mode, elevator state, current oor, and fault information at stop. • Main display area It displays the values that can be viewed or modied for different functions. It is the main operation interface. • Operation indication bar It indicates the functions of the left key and the right key. In the preceding gure, if you press the right key, the operation panel switches to the menu interface. 4.3.3 Brief Description of the Interfaces • Startup interface This interface displays when the LCD operator is powered on. After staying on this interface for a few seconds, the LCD operator switches to the next interface if the verication is correct. If the verication is incorrect, a prompt is displayed. All keys are invalid on this interface. Figure 4-10 Startup interface Elevator control expert Step with the world MDKE3-MNK The monitoring interface automatically appears after the startup interface. The monitoring interface displays the values of the monitoring parameters. A maximum of 32 parameters can be monitored totally, set in FA-01 and FA-02. You can rotate the knob to view these parameter values circularly. Figure 4-11 Monitoring interface 1 Set speed: 0.534 m/s 3 Bus voltage: 220.3 V 2 Rated speed: 1.600 m/s Menu Normal 01 Err31 • Main operation interface The main operation interface includes seven icons. You can select each icon by rotating the knob and press the Conrm key to enter the corresponding interface. Use of the NICE3000 new NICE3000 new User Manual - 76 - Figure 4-12 Main operation interface Select Normal 01 Back Parameters Copy Port Curve view Call Err help ? ־ Parameters You can view or modify all function codes of the controller. A three-level menu is supported, and you can read and modify the function code value in Level III menu. ־ Copy You can copy parameters of the controller to the LCD operator and download parameters to the controller. The LCD operator can store three groups of elevator parameters. ־ Port On this interface, you can view the status of all input and output terminals of the controller. ־ Curve view You can view the curve of specied controller parameters (such as torque current and feedback frequency) changed with the time. ־ Call You can use this function to simulate the car call and hall call signals of all oors. ־ Err help You can view the causes and solutions corresponding to the error code on this interface. ־ Operation panel setting On this interface, you can set the parameters of the LCD operator, including the password, time, date, and language. The setting is irrelative to the controller. 5 System Commissioning and Application Example System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 78 - Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example 5.1 System Commissioning CAUTION • Ensure that there is no person in the shaft or car before performing commissioning on the elevator. • Ensure that the peripheral circuit and mechanical installation are ready before performing commissioning. The following gure shows the commissioning procedure of the system. Figure 5-1 Commissioning procedure of the system End Perform trial inspection running Perform shaft auto-tuning Perform load cell auto-tuning Commission the door machine Perform trial normal-speed running Check the leveling accuracy Perform riding comfort commissioning Perform function commissioning Start Check the peripheral circuit Check the encoder Set related parameters of the elevator Perform motor auto-tuning 5.1.1 Check Before Commissioning The elevator needs to be commissioned after being installed; the correct commissioning guarantees safe and normal running of the elevator. Before performing electric commissioning, check whether the electrical part and mechanical part are ready for commissioning to ensure safety. At least two persons need to be onsite during commissioning so that the power supply can be cut off immediately when an abnormality occurs. NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 79 - 1. Check the eld mechanical and electric wiring. Before power-on, check the peripheral wiring to ensure component and personal safety. The items to be checked include: 1) Whether the component models are matched 2) Whether the safety circuit is conducted and reliable 3) Whether the door lock circuit is conducted and reliable 4) Whether the shaft is unobstructed, and the car has no passenger and meets the conditions for safe running 5) Whether the cabinet and traction motor are well grounded 6) Whether the peripheral circuit is correctly wired according to the drawings of the vendor 7) Whether all switches act reliably 8) Whether there is short-circuit to ground by checking the inter-phase resistance of the main circuit 9) Whether the elevator is set to the inspection state 10) Whether the mechanical installation is complete (otherwise, it will result in equipment damage and personal injury) 2. Check the encoder. The pulse signal from the encoder is critical to accurate control of the system. Before commissioning, check the following items carefully: 1) The encoder is installed reliably with correct wiring. For details on the encoder wiring, see section 3.7. 2) The signal cable and strong-current circuit of the encoder are laid in different ducts to prevent interference. 3) The encoder cable is preferably directly connected to the control cabinet. If the cable is not long enough and an extension cable is required, the extension cable must be a shielding cable and preferably welded to the original encoder cable by using the soldering iron. 4) The shielding cable of the encoder cable is grounded on the end connected to the controller (only one end is grounded to prevent interference). 3. Check the power supply before power-on. 1) The inter-phase voltage of the user power supply is within (380 V ± 15%), and the unbalance degree does not exceed 3%. 2) The power input voltage between terminals 24V and COM on the MCB is within (24 VDC ± 15%). 3) The total lead-in wire gauge and total switch capacity meet the requirements. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 80 - Note If the input voltage exceeds the allowable value, serious damage will be caused. Distinguish the negative and positive of the DC power supply. Do not run the system when there is input power phase loss. 4. Check the grounding. 1) Check that the resistance between the following points and the ground is close to innity. ־ R, S, T and PE ־ U, V, W and PE ־ 24V and PE on the MCB ־ Motor U, V, W and PE ־ Encoder 15V, A, B, PGM and PE ־ +, – bus terminals and PE ־ Safety circuit, door lock circuit, and inspection circuit terminals and PE 2) Check the grounding terminals of all elevator electrical components and the power supply of the control cabinet 5.1.2 Setting and Auto-tuning of Motor Parameters The NICE3000 new supports two major control modes, sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) and closed-loop vector control (CLVC). SFVC is applicable to inspection speed running for commissioning and fault judgment running during maintenance of the asynchronous motor. CLVC is applicable to normal elevator running. In CLVC mode, good driving performance and running efciency can be achieved in the prerequisite of correct motor parameters. ■ Motor Parameters to Be Set The motor parameters that need to be set are listed in the following table. Table 5-1 Motor parameters to be set Function Code Parameter Name Description F1-25 Motor type 0: Asynchronous motor 1: Synchronous motor F1-00 Encoder type 0: SIN/COS encoder 1: UVW encoder 2: ABZ incremental encoder F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000 NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 81 - Function Code Parameter Name Description F1-01 to F1-05 Rated motor power Rated motor voltage Rated motor current Rated motor frequency Rated motor rotational speed These parameters are model dependent, and you need to manually input them according to the nameplate. F0-00 Control mode 0: Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control F0-01 Command source selection 0: Operation panel control 1: Distance control F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0: Pre-torque invalid 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation 2: Automatic pre-torque compensation F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 0: No operation 1: With-load auto-tuning 2: No-load auto-tuning 3: Shaft auto-tuning ■ Precautions for Motor Auto-tuning Follow the following precautions: • Ensure that all wiring and installation meet the safety specications. • Ensure that the motor wiring is correct (UVW cables of the motor respectively connected to UVW cables of the controller) for with-load auto-tuning. If the motor wiring is incorrect, the motor may jitter or fail to run after the brake is released; in this case, you need to replace any two of the motor UVW cables. • Reset the current fault and then start auto-tuning, because the system cannot enter the auto-tuning state ("TUNE" is not displayed) when there is a fault. • Perform motor auto-tuning again if the phase sequence or encoder of the synchronous motor is changed. • For the synchronous motor, perform three or more times of auto-tuning, compare the obtained values of F1-06 (Encoder initial angle). The value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°, which indicates that the auto-tuning is successful. • After the auto-tuning is completed, perform trial inspection running. Check whether the current is normal, whether the actual running direction is the same as the set direction. If the running direction is different from the set direction, change the value of F2-10. • With-load auto-tuning is dangerous (inspection-speed running of many control cabinets is emergency electric running and the shaft safety circuit is shorted). Ensure that there is no person in the shaft in this auto-tuning mode. The following gure shows the motor auto-tuning process. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 82 - Figure 5-2 Motor auto-tuning process Set F1-25 correctly based on the actually used motor type Set encoder parameters F1-00 and F1-12 and motor parameters F1-01 to F1-05 correctly Set F0-01 to 0 (Operation panel control) For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to 1. After the operation panel displays "TUNE", press the RUN key. Static motor auto- tuning starts. (Asynchronous motor) With-load auto-tuning F1-25 = 1 (Synchronous motor) With-load auto-tuning F0-01 = 1 F1-11 = 1 F0-01 = 0 F1-11 = 2 For no-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to 2. The operation panel displays "TUNE". Release the brake manually and press the RUN key. Motor auto-tuning starts. After motor parameters F1- 14 to F1-18 are obtained, restore F0-01 to 1 (Distance control). Motor auto-tuning is completed. Check the initial angle and wiring mode of the encoder (F1-06 and F1-08) after motor auto-tuning. Perform motor auto- tuning multiple times and ensure that the difference between values of F1-06 is within 5° and values of F1-08 are the same. After motor parameter values (F1-06 to F1-08, F1-14, F1-19 to F1-20)) and current loop parameters are obtained, restore F0-01 to 1 (Distance control). Motor auto-tuning is completed. No-load auto-tuning No-load auto- tuning For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to 1. After the operation panel displays "TUNE", press the UP/DOWN button for inspection to start auto-tuning. The motor starts to run. More descriptions of motor auto-tuning are as follows: a. When the NICE3000 new drives the synchronous motor, an encoder is required to provide feedback signals. You must set the encoder parameters correctly before performing motor auto-tuning. b. During synchronous motor auto-tuning, the motor needs to rotate. The best auto-tuning mode is no-load auto-tuning; if this mode is impossible, then try with-load auto-tuning. c. For synchronous motor, with-load auto-tuning learns stator resistance, shaft-D and shaft-Q inductance, current loop (including zero servo) PI parameters, and encoder initial angle; no-load auto-tuning additionally learns the encoder wiring mode. d. For the asynchronous motor, static auto-tuning learns stator resistance, rotor resistance, and leakage inductance, and automatically calculates the mutual inductance and motor magnetizing current. Complete auto-tuning learns the mutual inductance, motor magnetizing current, and current loop parameters are learned. ■ Output State of RUN and Brake Contactors For the sake of safety in different control modes, the system handles the output commands to the RUN contactor or brake contactor differently. In some situations, it is necessary to release the RUN contactor or the brake contactor manually The following table lists the output state of the running and brake contactors. NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 83 - Table 5-2 Output state of the running and brake contactors Control mode Output State No-load Auto- tuning (F1-11 = 2) With-load Auto-tuning (F1-11 = 1) Operation Panel Control (F0-01 = 0) Distance Control (F0-01 = 1) Synchronous motor Asynchronous Motor RUN contactor Output Output Output Not output Output Brake contactor Not output Output Not output Not output Output 5.1.3 Trial Running at Normal Speed After ensuring that running at inspection speed is normal, perform shaft auto-tuning, and then you can perform trial running at normal speed (the elevator satises the safety running requirements). To perform shaft auto-tuning, the following conditions must be satised: 1. The signals of the encoder and leveling sensors (NC, NO) are correct and the slow- down switches are installed properly and act correctly. 2. When the elevator is at the bottom oor, the down slow-down 1 switch acts. 3. The elevator is in the inspection state. The control mode is distance control and CLVC (F0-00 = 1, F0-01 = 1). 4. The top oor number (F6-00) and bottom oor number (F6-01) are set correctly. 5. The system is not in the fault alarm state. If there is a fault at the moment, press STOP RES to reset the fault. Then set F1-11 to 3 on the operation panel or set F7 to 1 on the keypad of the MCB, and start shaft auto-tuning. Note For shaft auto-tuning when there are only two oors, the elevator needs to run to below the bottom leveling position, that is, the leveling sensor is disconnected from the leveling plate. There is no such requirement when there are multiple oors. 5.1.4 Door Machine Commissioning Correlation of the door machine controller and the elevator controller is that the CTB outputs door open/close command and the door machine controller feeds back the door open/close limit signal. After commissioning and installation of the door machine are complete, check whether the wiring is correct and whether the door open/close limit signals are consistent with the default setting. To perform the door machine commissioning, do as follows: 1. In the terminal control mode of the door machine controller, manually short the door open relay output terminal BM/B1 and the door close relay output terminal BM/B2 on the CTB, and observe whether the door machine can open and close correspondingly. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 84 - If the door machine cannot act properly, check whether BM/B1 and BM/B2 are wrongly connected to the input terminals of the door machine controller and whether commissioning of the door machine controller is complete. 2. After ensuring that control of door open/close is normal, check whether the door open/ close signal feedback from the door machine is normal. a. Check the NO/NC states of the door input signals by observing the input indicators on the CTB, as listed in the following table. Table 5-3 NO/NC state of the door input signals Door State Signal Input Point NO Input Signal NC Input Signal Indicator State F5-25 Setting Indicator State F5-25 Setting Door open limit X3 (door open limit 1) When the signal is active, the corresponding input indicator is ON. Bit2 = 1 When the signal is active, the corresponding input indicator is OFF. Bit2 = 0 X4 (door open limit 2) Bit4 = 1 Bit4 = 0 Door close limit X5 (door close limit 1) Bit3 = 1 Bit3 = 0 X6 (door close limit 2) Bit5 = 1 Bit5 = 0 For details on the setting of F5-25, see the description of F5-25 in Chapter 7. b. Check whether the door open/close limit signal received by the system is correct. As shown in the following figure which is part of display of parameter F5-35 on the operation panel, segments E and C of the upmost right 7-segment LED are the monitoring points of door open limit and door close limit. ־ Segment C ON, segment E OFF: The system receives the door open limit signal and the door is in the open state. ־ Segment E ON, segment C OFF: The system receives the door close limit signal and the door is in the close state. The two segments should be OFF in the door open/close process. Control the door to the open or close state manually and view the value of F5-35. If the following screen is displayed, it indicates that the door machine controller feeds back the correct door open and close signals. Figure 5-3 Door open and close limit monitoring signals 12345 A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP Door 1 open limit Door 1 close limit NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 85 - 5.1.5 Riding Comfort The riding comfort is an important factor of the elevator's overall performance. Improper installation of mechanical parts and improper parameter settings will cause bad comfort. Enhancing the riding comfort mainly involves adjustment of the controller output and the elevator's mechanical construction. ■ Controller Output The parameters that may inuence the riding comfort are described in this part. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description F1-09 Current lter time (synchronous motor) 0.00–40.00 0.00 It can reduce the lower- frequency vertical jitter during running. F1-18 Magnetizing current 0.01–300.00 0.00 A Increasing the value can improve the loading capacity of the asynchronous motor. F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 F2-00 and F2-01 are the PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is lower than F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1). F2-03 and F2-04 are the PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is higher than F2- 02 (Switchover frequency 2). The regulation parameters between F2-02 and F2-04 are the weighted average value of F2-00 & F2-01 and F2-03 & F2-04. F2-01 Speed loop integral time TI1 0.01–10.00s 0.60s F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain KP2 0–100 35 F2-04 Speed loop integral time TI2 0.01–10.00s 0.80s F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz For a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time. Be aware that a fast system response causes system oscillation. The recommended regulating method is as follows: If the default setting cannot satisfy the requirements, make slight regulation. Increase the proportional gain rst to the largest value under which the system does not oscillate. Then decrease the integral time to ensure fast responsiveness and small overshoot. If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are set to 0, only F2-03 and F2-04 are valid. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description F2-06 Current loop proportional gain 10–500 60 F2-06 and F2-07 are the current loop adjustment parameters in the vector control algorithm. F2-07 Current loop integral gain 10–500 30 System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 86 - The optimum values of these two parameters are obtained during motor auto-tuning, and you need not modify them. Appropriate setting of the parameters can restrain jitter during running and have obvious effect on the riding comfort. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description F2-18 Startup acceleration time 0.000–1.500s 0.000s It can reduce the terrace feeling at startup caused by the breakout friction of the guide rail. F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 m/s 0.000 m/s F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500s 0.000s F3-18 Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000s 0.200s It species the zero speed holding time before brake output. F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000s 0.200s It species the time required from when the system outputs the open signal to when the brake is completely released. F3-20 Zero-speed control time at end 0.200–1.500s 0.200s It species the zero speed holding time after the brake is applied. F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000s 0.600s It species the time from when the system outputs the brake applying signal to when the brake is completely applied. Figure 5-4 Running time sequence V (speed) t (time) F3-18 F3-19 F8-11 F3-20 RUN contactor Brake contactor Shorting door lock circuit contactor Shorting motor stator contactor Internal running status Leveling signal RUN contactor feedback Brake contactor feedback Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback Shorting motor stator contactor feedback F2-17 NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 87 - The release time of the brakes varies according to the types and the response time of the brakes is greatly influenced by the ambient temperature. A high brake coil temperature slows the brake responsiveness. Thus, when the riding comfort at startup or stop cannot be improved by adjusting zero servo or load cell compensation parameters, appropriately increase the values of F3-19 and F3-20 to check whether the brake release time inuences the riding comfort. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0: Pre-torque invalid 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation 2: Automatic pre-torque compensation 0 Set this parameter based on actual requirement. F2-11 Zero servo current coefcient 0.20%–50.0% 15.0% These are zero- servo regulating parameters when F8-01 is set to 2 (Automatic pre-torque compensation). F2-12 Zero servo speed loop KP 0.00–2.00 0.50 F2-13 Zero servo speed loop KI 0.00–2.00 0.60 When F8-01 is set to 2 (Automatic pre-torque compensation), the system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at startup. a. Gradually increase F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) until that the rollback is cancelled at brake release and the motor does not vibrate. b. Increase the value of F2-11 (Zero servo current coefcient) if the motor jitters when F2- 13 (Zero servo speed loop TI) is less than 1.00. c. Motor vibration and acoustic noise indicate excessive value of F2-12 (Zero servo speed loop KP). Use the default value of F2-12. d. If the motor noise is large at no-load-cell startup, decrease the values of the zero servo current loop parameters (F2-14 and F2-15). Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0%–100.0% 50.0% These are pre-torque regulating parameters. F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 When F8-01 is set to 1 (Load cell pre-torque compensation), the system with a load cell pre- outputs the torque matched the load to ensure the riding comfort of the elevator. • Motor driving state: full-load up, no-load down • Motor braking state: full-load down, no-load up "Pre-torque offset" is actually the elevator balance coefcient, namely, the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the car and counterweight are balanced. "Drive gain" or "Brake gain" scales the elevator’s present pre-torque coefcient when the motor runs at the drive or brake side. If the gain set is higher, then the calculated value of System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 88 - startup pro-torque compensation is higher. The controller identies the braking or driving state according to the load cell signal and automatically calculates the required torque compensation value. When an analog device is used to measure the load, these parameters are used to adjust the elevator startup. The method of adjusting the startup is as follows: • In the driving state, increasing the value of F8-03 could reduce the rollback during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start. • In the braking state, increasing the value of F8-04 could reduce the jerk in command direction during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start. ■ Mechanical Construction The mechanical construction affecting the riding comfort involves installation of the guide rail, guide shoe, steel rope, and brake, balance of the car, and the resonance caused by the car, guild rail and motor. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may arouse bad riding comfort. 1. Installation of the guide rail mainly involves the verticality and surface atness of the guide rail, smoothness of the guide rail connection and parallelism between two guide rails (including guide rails on the counterweight side). 2. Tightness of the guide shoes (including the one on the counterweight side) also inuences the riding comfort. The guide shoes must not be too loose or tight. 3. The drive from the motor to the car totally depends on the steel rope. Large exibility of the steel rope with irregular resistance during the car running may cause curly oscillation of the car. In addition, unbalanced stress of multiple steel ropes may cause the car to jitter during running. 4. The riding comfort during running may be inuenced if the brake arm is installed too tightly or released incompletely. 5. If the car weight is unbalanced, it will cause uneven stress of the guide shoes that connect the car and the guide rail. As a result, the guide shoes will rub with the guide rail during running, affecting the riding comfort. 6. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may also affect the riding comfort. 7. Resonance is an inherent character of a physical system, related to the material and quality of system components. If you are sure that the oscillation is caused by resonance, reduce the resonance by increasing or decreasing the car weight or counterweight and adding resonance absorbers at connections of the components (for example, place rubber blanket under the motor). 5.1.6 Password Setting The NICE3000 new provides the parameter password protection function. Here gives an example of changing the password into 12345 ( indicates the blinking digit), as shown in the following gure. NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 89 - Figure 5-5 Example of changing the password F00.000 Status parameter PRG (default display) FP PRG FP-00 00000 PRG PRG ENTER To save the setting ENTER ENTER PRG FP-01 12345 If there is a blinking digit, press / / to modify the digit. • After you set the user password (set FP-00 to a non-zero value), the system requires user password authentication (the system displays "------") when you press PRG. In this case, you can modify the function code parameters only after entering the password correctly. • For factory parameters (group FF), you also need to enter the factory password. • Do not try to modify the factory parameters. If these parameters are set improperly, the system may be unstable or abnormal. • In the password protection unlocked state, you can change the password at any time. The last input number will be the user password. • If you want to disable the password protection function, enter the correct password and then set FP-00 to 0. If FP-00 is a non-zero value at power-on, the parameters are protected by the password. • Remember the password you set. Otherwise, the system cannot be unlocked. 5.2 System Application 5.2.1 Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure Passengers may be trapped in the car if power failure suddenly happens during the use of the elevator. The emergency evacuation function at power failure is designed to solve the problem. The emergency evacuation function is implemented in the following two modes: • Uninterrupted power supply (UPS) • Shorting PMSM stator The two modes are described in detailed in the following part. ■ Emergency Evacuation 220 V UPS In this scheme, the 220 V UPS provides power supply to the main unit and the drive control circuit. The following gure shows the emergency evacuation 220 V UPS circuit. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 90 - Figure 5-6 Emergency evacuation 220 V UPS circuit 220 VAC 115 VAC UPS-220 V UPC Safety circuit 21 22 Y6 M6 MCB 61 62 21 22 2 1 3 4 R N Transformer 115 VDC 220 VAC UPS-0 V (6 A) (6 A) A1 A2 65 1413 UPC NICE3000 new R S T UPC Note The UPS emergency evacuation signal can be output only by Y6. The following gure shows various contacts of the contactors. Figure 5-7 Various contacts of the contactors 0 V Safety contactor A1 A2 53 54 11 14 Phase sequence relay Safety circuit UPC UPC 71 72 21 22 UPC X20 24 V Emergency feedback UPC 2 1 4 3 6 5 13 14 22 21 54 53 61 62 72 71 81 82 110 V The UPS power is recommended in the following table. Table 5-4 Recommended UPS power for each power class UPS Power Controller Power 1 kVA (700–800 W) P ≤ 5.5 kW 2 kVA (1400–1600 W) 5.5 kW < P ≤ 11 kW 3 kVA (2100–2400 W) 15 kW ≤ P ≤ 22 kW NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 91 - The following table lists the setting of the related parameters. Table 5-5 Parameter setting under the 220 V UPS scheme Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range F6-48 Emergency evacuation switching speed 0.010–0.630 m/s F6-49 Evacuation parking oor 0 to F6-01 F8-09 Emergency evacuation operation speed at power failure 0.05 m/s F8-10 Emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure 0: Invalid 1: UPS 2: 48 V battery power supply F5-20 (X20) X20 function selection 59 (UPS valid signal) F5-31 (Y6) Y6 function selection 13 (Emergency evacuation automatic switchover) ■ Shorting PMSM Stator Shorting PMSM stator means shorting phases UVW of the PMSM, which produces resistance to restrict movement of the elevator car. In field application, an auxiliary NC contact is usually added to the NO contact of the output contactor to short PMSM UVW phases to achieve the effect. It is feasible in theory but may cause over-current actually. Due to the poor quality of the contactor and the wiring of adding the auxiliary contact, the residual current of the controller is still high when the outputs UVW are shorted at abnormal stop. This results in an over-current fault and may damage the controller or motor. Monarch's shorting PMSM stator scheme requires the installation of an independent contactor for shorting PMSM stator. The shorting PMSM stator function is implemented via the relay NC contact. On the coil circuit of the RUN contactor, an NO contact of the shorting PMSM stator contactor is connected in serial, to ensure that output short-circuit does not occur when the parameter setting is incorrect. The following gure shows wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 92 - Figure 5-8 Wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor Y1 M1 FX: Shorting PMSM stator contactor NICE3000 new CN7 Y1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y5 M5 Y6 M6 R S T Three-phase AC power supply Safety contactor Braking resistor + – PB U V W SW: RUN contactor Safety circuit 5 6 FX 1 2 3 4 5 6 FX 1 2 3 4 M Encoder Motor MCTC-PG PG card Y3 M3 110 VAC FX SW X18 CN1 X18 24V SW Shielding layer The parameter setting in such wiring mode is described in the following table. Table 5-6 Parameter setting under the shorting PMSM stator scheme Function Code Parameter Name Value Description F5-18 X18 function selection 30 Allocate X18 with "Input of shorting PMSM stator feedback signal". F5-28 Y3 function selection 12 Allocate Y3 with "Output of shorting PMSM stator contactor feedback signal". FE-33 Bit8 0 Use an NC shorting motor stator contactor. More details on the emergency evacuation setting are provided in F6-45, as listed in the following table. Table 5-7 Parameter description of F6-45 Bit Function Description Binary Setting Remarks Bit0 Direction determine mode 0 Automatically calculating the direction 0 Load direction determining (based on load cell data or half- load signal) 1 Direction of nearest landing oor If the torque direction is automatically calculated, the no- load-cell function must be enabled, that is, F8-01 is set to 2. Bit1 0 1 0 NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 93 - Bit Function Description Binary Setting Remarks Bit2 Stop position 1 Stop at the base oor - 0 Stop at nearest landing oor - Bit3 Door open at single leveling signal 1 Stop and open door at a single leveling signal - 0 Normal leveling stop - Bit4 Startup compensation 1 Startup torque compensation valid in emergency evacuation running When it is set that the torque direction is automatically calculated, enable automatic startup torque compensation. Bit8 Emergency evacuation running time protection 1 If the elevator does not arrive at the required oor after 50s emergency evacuation running time, Err31 is reported. This function is invalid when the function of switching over shorting stator braking mode to controller drive is used. Bit10 Emergency buzzer output 1 The buzzer output is active during UPS emergency evacuation running. - Bit11 Reserved 0 - - Bit12 Shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive 1 Enable the function of switching over the shorting stator braking mode to controller drive. - Bit13 Mode of shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive 1 Speed setting If the speed is still lower than the value set in F6-48 after the elevator is in shorting stator braking mode for 10s, the controller starts to drive the elevator. 0 Time setting If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds 50s, the controller starts to drive the elevator. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 94 - Bit Function Description Binary Setting Remarks Bit14 Emergency evacuation exit mode 1 Exit at door close limit - 0 Exit at door open limit - Bit15 Function selection of shorting stator braking mode 1 Enable this function. When this function is enabled, the setting of related function codes becomes effective. 5.2.2 Parallel Control of Two Elevators The NICE3000 new supports parallel control of two elevators, which is implemented by using the CANbus communication port for information exchange and processing between the two elevators. The NICE3000 new also supports group control of three to eight elevators if a group control board is used. This implements coordination between multiple elevators to respond to hall calls and improves the elevator use efciency. The NICE3000 new is compatible with the NICE3000 and NICE5000. This section describes the use of two elevators in parallel control. For use of multiple elevators in group control, refer to the description of the group control board or contact Monarch. ■ Communication Ports for Parallel Control The following table lists the parameter setting of parallel control. Table 5-8 Parameter setting of parallel control by means of communication ports Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Setting in Parallel Control F6-07 Number of elevators in group mode 1–8 2 F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 Master elevator: 1 Slave elevator: 2 F6-09 Program control selection 2 Bit2: Parallel implemented at monitoring port Bit2 = 1 when CN5 of the RS232 communication port is used for parallel control Bit3: Parallel implemented at CAN2 Bit3 = 1 when CN4 of the CAN2 communication port is used for parallel control Bit4: Parallel control in compatibility with NICE3000 Bit4 = 1 when the NICE3000 is involved in parallel/group control Note By default, the CAN1 communication port is used for parallel control by default. Therefore, you need not select the parallel control port. When the CAN2 communication port is used for parallel control, you need not set the CTB address NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 95 - switch. ■ Parallel Control by Using CAN1 (Terminal CN3) When the CAN1 communication port (CN3 terminal) is used for parallel control, you need to set the CTB addresses, according to the following table. Table 5-9 Address and jumper setting of the CTB for CAN1 is used for parallel control CTB Jumper Setting Address Setting CTB of elevator 1# J2 ON OFF CTB of master elevator CTB of elevator 2# J2 ON OFF CTB of slave elevator Figure 5-9 Wiring when CAN1 is used for parallel control NICE3000 new CN3 CN7 Y1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y5 M5 Y6 M6 24V COM CAN+ CAN- MOD+ MOD- CN2 24V CAN+ CAN- COM CTB MCTC-CTB HCB MCTC-HCB 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 1 2 3 4 Up button indicator Up button NICE3000 new CN3 CN7 Y1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y5 M5 Y6 M6 24V COM CAN+ CAN- MOD+ MOD- CN2 24V CAN+ CAN- COM CTB MCTC-CTB HCB MCTC-HCB 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 1 2 3 4 Elevator 1# Elevator 1# Elevator 2# Elevator 2# 1 2 3 4 Down button indicator Down button 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 JP3 JP4 JP1 JP2 1 2 3 4 JP3 JP4 1 2 3 4 JP1 JP2 1 2 3 4 CAN1 cables for parallel control ■ Parallel Control by Using CAN2 (Terminal CN4) This mode can be implemented by directly connecting the CN4 terminals of two elevators and setting related parameters of group F6. You need not set the CTB addresses. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 96 - Figure 5-10 Wiring when CAN2 is used for parallel control NICE3000 new CN3 CN4 24V COM CAN+ CAN- MOD+ MOD- CN2 24V CAN+ CAN- COM CTB MCTC-CTB HCB MCTC-HCB 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 1 2 3 4 Up button indicator Up button NICE3000 new CN3 CN4 24V COM CAN+ CAN- MOD+ MOD- CN2 24V CAN+ CAN- COM CTB MCTC-CTB HCB MCTC-HCB 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 1 2 3 4 Elevator 1# Elevator 1# Elevator 2# Elevator 2# 1 2 3 4 Down button indicator Down button 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 JP3 JP4 JP1 JP2 1 2 3 4 JP3 JP4 1 2 3 4 JP1 JP2 1 2 3 4 CAN2+ CAN2- GND CAN2+ CAN2- GND CAN2 cables for parallel control ■ Parallel Control by Using RS232 (Terminal CN5) When CANbus communication is applied for parallel control, if the 24 V power voltages of two systems are different or the external interference is severe, the communication effect is affected. To achieve better communication effect in parallel mode, we adopt RS485 at terminal CN5 of the monitoring port on the MCB for communication of the parallel mode. In this case, the RS232 communication signal needs to be converted to RS485 communication signal. Thus, two optical-isolated RS232/RS485 converters (model: U485A) are required. The following figure shows the wiring of parallel control implemented at the RS232 monitoring port. NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 97 - Figure 5-11 Wiring of parallel control implemented at the monitoring port NICE3000 new CN3 24V COM CAN+ CAN- MOD+ MOD- CN2 24V CAN+ CAN- COM CTB MCTC-CTB HCB MCTC-HCB 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 1 2 3 4 Up button indicator Up button NICE3000 new CN3 24V COM CAN+ CAN- MOD+ MOD- CN2 24V CAN+ CAN- CO M CTB MCTC-CTB HCB MCTC-HCB 24V COM MOD+ MOD- 1 2 3 4 Elevator 1# Elevator 1# Elevator 2# Elevator 2# 1 2 3 4 Down button indicator Down button 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 JP3 JP4 JP1 JP2 1 2 3 4 JP3 JP4 1 2 3 4 JP1 JP2 1 2 3 4 CN5 CN5 B D+ D- D+ D- RS232-RS485 converter RS232-RS485 converter RS485 cables for parallel control ■ Setting of Physical Floors Physical oors, relative to the NICE control system, are dened by the installation position of the leveling plate. The oor (such as the ground oor) at which the lowest leveling plate is installed corresponds to physical oor 1. The top physical oor is the accumulative number of the leveling plates. In parallel mode, the physical oor numbers of the same oor for two elevators are consistent. If the oor structures of two elevators are different, physical oors should start with the oor with the lowest position. The physical oors at the overlapped area of the two elevators are the same. Even if one elevator does not stop a oor in the overlapped area, a leveling plate should be installed there. You can make the elevator not stop at the oor by setting service oors. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 98 - When two elevators are in parallel mode, the addresses of the HCBs should be set according to physical floors. Parallel running can be implemented only when the HCB address set for one elevator is the same as that for the other elevator in terms of the same oor. Note In parallel mode, the top oor (F6-00) and bottom oor (F6-01) of the elevators should be set based on corresponding physical oors. Assume that there are two elevators in parallel mode. Elevator 1 stops at oor B1, oor 1, oor 2, and oor 3, while elevator 2 stops at oor 1, oor 3, and oor 4. Now, you need to set related parameters and HCB addresses according to the following table. Table 5-10 Parameter setting and HCB addresses of two elevators Elevator 1 Elevator 2 Number of elevators in group mode 2 2 Elevator No. 1 2 Actual oor Physical oor HCB address HCB display HCB address HCB display B1 1 1 FE-01 = 1101 1 2 2 FE-02 = 1901 2 FE-02 = 1901 2 3 3 FE-03 = 1902 Non-stop oor but leveling plate required FE-03 = 1902 3 4 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 5 5 FE-05 = 1904 Bottom oor (F6-01) 1 2 Top oor (F6-00) 4 5 Service oor (F6-05) 65535 65531 (not stop at physical oor 3) NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 99 - 5.2.3 Opposite Door Control Set related parameters according to the following table. Table 5-11 Parameter setting for opposite door control Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6-40 Program control selection 1 Bit2: JP16 input used as back door selection (button) 0 Bit3: JP16 input used as the back door open signal 0 Bit4: Opening only one door of opposite doors under manual control 0 Bit13: Folding command used as disability function (= 1) and back door function (= 0) 0 Bit14: Car call command folding 0 Bit15: JP20 used for switchover to back door 0 F8-16 Start address of hall call auxiliary command 0–40 0 FB-00 Number of door machine(s) 1–2 1 FE-33 Elevator function selection 2 Bit15: Opposite door independent control 0 System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 100 - Table 5-12 Selection of the opposite door mode Opposite Door Mode Parameter Setting Function Description Use Method Old mode (same as the NICE3000) Mode 1 FE-33 Bit15 = 1; Fb-00 = 2 FC-04 = 0 (Simultaneous control) The front door and back door acts simultaneously upon arrival for hall calls and car calls. The hall call addresses of the front door are set based on oor (1- 15). The hall call addresses of the back door are set based on oor +16 (17-31). Two CCBs are connected in serial. The car calls of the front door are controlled by JP1 to JP15 of CCB1, and the car calls of the back door are controlled by JP1 to JP15 of CCB2. A maximum of 15 oors are supported. Mode 2 FC-04 = 1 (Hall call independent, car call simultaneous) The corresponding door opens upon arrival for hall calls from this door. The front door and back door act simultaneously upon arrival for car calls. Mode 3 FC-04 = 2 (Hall call independent, car call manual control) The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call from this door. Upon arrival for car calls, the door to open is selected between the front door and back door by using the door switchover switch. Mode 4 FC-04 = 3 (Hall call independent, car call independent) The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call and car calls from this door. New mode Mode 1 Fb-00 = 2 F8-16 = N (N > current top oor FC-04 = 0 (Simultaneous control) The front door and back door act simultaneously upon arrival for hall calls and car calls. The hall call addresses of the front door are set based on oor (1- N). The hall call addresses of the back door are set based on oor (N+1 to 40). The front door CCB is connected to CN7 of the CTB, and the back door CCB is connected to CN8 of the CTB. A maximum of 20 oors are supported. Mode 2 FC-04 = 1 (Hall call independent, car call simultaneous) The corresponding door opens upon arrival for hall calls from this door. The front door and back door act simultaneously upon arrival for car calls. Mode 3 FC-04 = 2 (Hall call independent, car call manual control) The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call from this door. Upon arrival for car calls, the door to open is selected between the front door and back door by using the door switchover switch. Mode 4 FC-04 = 3 (Hall call independent, car call independent) The corresponding door opens upon arrival for halls call and car calls from this door. NICE3000 new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example - 101 - Note In the re emergency, inspection or re-leveling state, the opposite door is under simultaneous control rather than independent control. 5.2.4 VIP Function Description The NICE3000 new provides the VIP function that the elevator rst directly runs to the VIP floor and provides services for special persons. After the system enters the VIP state, current car calls and halls are cleared; door open or close needs to be controlled manually; the elevator does not respond to hall calls. Here gives an example to explain how to use the VIP function and set the VIP oor. Assume that there are oors 1 to 20 for the elevator, and oor 8 is set as the VIP oor. Table 5-13 Parameter setting of the VIP function Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Value Remarks F6-00 Top oor of the elevator F6-01 to 40 20 They are used to set the top oor and bottom oor of the elevator, determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates. F6-01 Bottom oor of the elevator 1 to F6-00 1 F6-12 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 8 Set oor 8 as the VIP oor. FE-32 Elevator function selection 1 Bit9: VIP function Bit9 = 1 The VIP service is enabled. Fd-07 HCB:JP1 input 0: Reserved NO/NC input: 1/33: Elevator lock signal 2/34: Fire emergency signal 3/35: Current oor forbidden 4/36: VIP oor signal 5/37: Security oor signal 6/38: Door close button input 4 These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The setting is effective to the HCBs for all oors. Fd-08 HCB:JP2 input 4 F6-46 VIP function selection Bit0: VIP enabled by hall call (at VIP oor) Bit0 = 1 The VIP function is enabled at a hall call. Bit1: VIP enabled by terminal Bit1 = 1 After the hall call input for the VIP function is active, the system enters the VIP state. Bit2 to Bit7: Reserved - - Bit8: Number of VIP car calls limited Bit8 = 1 If this function is enabled, only one car call is supported in the VIP state. System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000 new User Manual - 102 - When there is a hall call at the VIP oor, the system automatically enters the VIP state. After the VIP input terminal is ON, the elevator returns to the VIP oor to provide the VIP service. The VIP running times is limited by bit8 of F6-46. If bit8 is set to 1, the elevator responds to only one car call (the last one); after arriving at the oor required by the car call, the elevator automatically exits the VIP state. If bit8 is set to 0, the number of car calls is not limited. The elevator automatically exits the VIP state if it does not enter the car call running within 30s after each time stop or after it executes all car calls. If there is no car call 30s after the elevator enters the VIP state, the elevator automatically exits the VIP state. 6 Function Code Table Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 104 - Chapter 6 Function Code Table 6.1 Function Code Description 1. There are a total of 18 function code groups, each of which includes several function codes. The function codes adopt the three-level menu. The function code group number is Level-I menu; the function code number is Level-II menu; the function code setting is Level-III menu. 2. The meaning of each column in the function code table is as follows: Function Code Indicates the function code number. Parameter Name Indicates the parameter name of the function code. Setting Range Indicates the setting range of the parameter. Default Indicates the default setting of the parameter at factory. Unit Indicates the measurement unit of the parameter. Property Indicates whether the parameter can be modied (including the modication conditions) The modication property of the parameters includes three types, described as follows: " ☆ ": The parameter can be modied when the controller is in either stop or running state. " ★ ": The parameter cannot be modied when the controller is in the running state. " ● ": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modied. The system automatically restricts the modification property of all parameters to prevent mal-function. 6.2 Function Code Groups On the LED operation panel, press PRG and then or , and you can view the function code groups. The function code groups are classied as follows: NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 105 - F0 Basic parameters F9 Time parameters F1 Motor parameters FA Keypad setting parameters F2 Vector control parameters Fb Door function parameters F3 Running control parameters FC Protection function parameters F4 Floor parameters Fd Communication parameters F5 Terminal function parameters FE Elevator function parameters F6 Basic elevator parameters FF Factory parameters F7 Test function parameters FP User parameters F8 Enhanced function parameters Fr Leveling adjustment parameters 6.3 Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Group F0: Basic parameters F0-00 Control mode 0: Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/ F) control 1 - ★ F0-01 Command source selection 0: Operation panel control 1: Distance control 1 - ★ F0-02 Running speed under operation panel control 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆ F0-03 Maximum running speed 0.100 to F0-04 1.600 m/s ★ F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.250–4.000 1.600 m/s ★ F0-05 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg ★ F0-06 Maximum frequency 20.00–99.00 50.00 Hz ★ F0-07 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz ★ Group F1: Motor parameters F1-00 Encoder type 0: SIN/COS encoder 1: UVW encoder 2: ABZ incremental encoder 0 - ★ F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0 Model dependent kW ★ F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–600 Model dependent V ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 106 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00 Model dependent A ★ F1-04 Rated motor frequency 0.00–99.00 50.00 Hz ★ F1-05 Rated motor rotational speed 0–3000 1460 RPM ★ F1-06 Encoder initial angle (synchronous motor) 0.0–359.9 0 Degree (°) ★ F1-07 Encoder angle at power-off (synchronous motor) 0.0–359.9 0 Degree (°) ★ F1-08 Synchronous motor wiring mode 0–15 0 - ★ F1-09 Current lter time (synchronous motor) 0–40 0 - ★ F1-10 Encoder verication selection 0–65535 0 - ★ F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 0: No operation 1: With-load auto-tuning 2: No-load auto-tuning 3: Shaft auto-tuning 0 - ★ F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000 2048 PPR ★ F1-13 Encoder wire-breaking detection time 0–10.0 1.0 s ★ F1-14 Stator resistance (asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model dependent Ω ★ F1-15 Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model dependent Ω ★ F1-16 Leakage inductance (asynchronous motor) 0.00–300.00 Model dependent mH ★ F1-17 Mutual inductance (asynchronous motor) 0.1–3000.0 Model dependent mH ★ F1-18 Magnetizing current (asynchronous motor) 0.01–300.00 Model dependent A ★ F1-19 Shaft Q inductance (torque) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★ F1-20 Shaft D inductance (excitation) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★ F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★ F1-25 Motor type 0: Asynchronous motor 1: Synchronous motor 1 - ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 107 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Group F2: Vector control parameters F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 - ★ F2-01 Speed loop integral time TI1 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★ F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★ F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain KP2 0–100 35 - ★ F2-04 Speed loop integral time TI2 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★ F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz ★ F2-06 Current loop KP1 (torque) 10–500 60 - ★ F2-07 Current loop KI1 (torque) 10–500 30 - ★ F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★ F2-10 Elevator running direction 0: Running direction and position pulse direction unchanged 1: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction reversed 2: Running direction unchanged, position pulse direction reversed 3: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction unchanged 0 - ★ F2-11 Zero servo current coefcient 0.20–50.0 15 - ★ F2-12 Zero servo speed loop KP 0.00–2.00 0.5 - ★ F2-13 Zero servo speed loop KI 0.00–2.00 0.6 - ★ F2-16 Torque acceleration time 1–500 1 ms ★ F2-17 Torque deceleration time 1–500 350 ms ★ F2-18 Startup acceleration time 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 108 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Group F3: Running control parameters F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★ F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s ★ F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s 2 ★ F3-03 Acceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ F3-04 Acceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s 2 ★ F3-06 Deceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ F3-07 Deceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ F3-08 Special deceleration rate 0.500–2.000 0.900 m/s 2 ★ F3-09 Pre-deceleration distance 0–90.0 0.0 mm ★ F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s ★ F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.630 0.250 m/s ★ F3-12 Position of up slow- down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-13 Position of down slow- down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-14 Position of up slow- down 2 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-15 Position of down slow- down 2 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-16 Position of up slow- down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-17 Position of down slow- down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-18 Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★ F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ★ F3-20 Zero-speed control time at end 0.200–1.500 0.200 s ★ F3-21 Low-speed re-leveling speed 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★ Group F4: Floor parameters F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 109 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F4-01 Current oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ F4-02 High byte of current oor position 0–65535 1 Pulses ● F4-03 Low byte of current oor position 0–65535 34464 Pulses ● F4-04 Length 1 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-05 Length 2 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-06 High byte of oor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-07 Low byte of oor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-08 High byte of oor height 2 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-09 Low byte of oor height 2 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-10 High byte of oor height 3 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-11 Low byte of oor height 3 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-12 High byte of oor height 4 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-13 Low byte of oor height 4 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-14 High byte of oor height 5 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-15 Low byte of oor height 5 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-16 High byte of oor height 6 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-17 Low byte of oor height 6 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-18 High byte of oor height 7 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-19 Low byte of oor height 7 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-20 High byte of oor height 8 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-21 Low byte of oor height 8 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 110 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F4-22 High byte of oor height 9 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-23 Low byte of oor height 9 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-24 High byte of oor height 10 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-25 Low byte of oor height 10 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ Floor height 11 to oor height 37 F4-80 High byte of oor height 38 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-81 Low byte of oor height 38 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-82 High byte of oor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-83 Low byte of oor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ Group F5: Terminal function parameters F5-00 Attendant/Automatic switchover time 3–200 3 s ★ F5-01 X1 function selection 08/40: Inspection signal 09/41: Inspection up signal 10/42: Inspection down signal 11/43: Fire emergency signal 12/44: Up limit signal 13/45: Down limit signal 14/46: Overload signal 15/47: Full-load signal 16/48: Up slow-down 1 signal 17/49: Down slow-down 1 signal 18/50: Up slow-down 2 signal (To be continued) 33 - ★ F5-02 X2 function selection 35 - ★ F5-03 X3 function selection 34 - ★ F5-04 X4 function selection 4 - ★ F5-05 X5 function selection 5 - ★ F5-06 X6 function selection 38 - ★ F5-07 X7 function selection 39 - ★ F5-08 X8 function selection 22 - ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 111 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-09 X9 function selection 19/51: Down slow-down 2 signal 20/52: Up slow-down 3 signal 21/53: Down slow-down 3 signal 22/54: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback 23/55: Fireghter switch signal 24/56: Door machine 1 light curtain signal 25/57: Door machine 2 light curtain signal 26/58: Brake contactor feedback 2 signal 27/59: UPS valid signal 28/60: Elevator lock signal 29/61: Safety circuit 2 feedback signal 30/62: Shorting PMSM stator feedback signal 31/63: Door lock circuit 2 feedback signal 32/64: Reserved 65/97: Door machine 1 safety edge signal 66/98: Door machine 2 safety edge signal 67/99: Motor overheat signal 68/100: Earthquake signal 69/101: Back door forbidden signal 70/102: Light-load signal 71/103: Half-load signal 72/104: Fire emergency oor switchover signal (End) 40 - ★ F5-10 X10 function selection 09 - ★ F5-11 X11 function selection 10 - ★ F5-12 X12 function selection 44 - ★ F5-13 X13 function selection 45 - ★ F5-14 X14 function selection 48 - ★ F5-15 X15 function selection 49 - ★ F5-16 X16 function selection 50 - ★ F5-17 X17 function selection 51 - ★ F5-18 X18 function selection 00 - ★ F5-19 X19 function selection 00 - ★ F5-20 X20 function selection 00 - ★ F5-21 X21 function selection 00 - ★ F5-22 X22 function selection 00 - ★ F5-23 X23 function selection 00 - ★ F5-24 X24 function selection 00 - ★ F5-25 CTB input type 0–511 320 - ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 112 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-26 Y1 function selection 0: Invalid 1: RUN contactor control 2: Brake contactor control 3: Shorting door lock circuit contactor control 4: Fire emergency oor arrival signal feedback 5: Door machine 1 open 6: Door machine 1 close 7: Door machine 2 open 8: Door machine 2 close 9: Brake and RUN contactors healthy 10: Fault state 11: Running monitor 12: Shorting PMSM stator contactor 13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover 14: System healthy 15: Emergency buzzer control 16: High-voltage startup of brake 17: Elevator running in up direction 18: Lamp/Fan running 19: Medical sterilization 20: Non-door zone stop 21: Electric lock 22: Non-service state 1 - ★ F5-27 Y2 function selection 2 - ★ F5-28 Y3 function selection 3 - ★ F5-29 Y4 function selection 4 - ★ F5-30 Y5 function selection 0 - ★ F5-31 Y6 function selection 0 - ★ F5-32 Communication state display Monitoring of CANbus and Modbus communication states - - ● NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 113 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-33 Terminal program control Bit3: Elevator re emergency requirement for Hong Kong Bit4: Arrival gong disabled at night Bit6: Door lock disconnected at inspection switched over to normal running Bit7: Fault code not displayed on the keypad Bit8: Door open command cancelled immediately at door open limit Bit9: Car stop and zero- speed torque holding at abnormal brake feedback 0 - ★ F5-34 Terminal state display Monitoring of I/O terminals on MCB - - ● F5-35 Terminal state display Monitoring of I/O terminals on CTB, CCB and HOP - - ● F5-36 Load cell input selection 0: Invalid 1: CTB digital input 2: CTB analog input 3: MCB analog input 1 - ★ F5-37 X25 function selection 0: No function 4: Safety circuit signal 5: Door lock circuit signal 0 - ★ F5-38 X26 function selection 0 - ★ F5-39 X27 function selection 0 - ★ Group F6: Basic elevator parameters F6-00 Top oor of the elevator F6-01 to 40 9 - ★ F6-01 Bottom oor of the elevator 1 to F6-00 1 - ★ F6-02 Parking oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ F6-03 Fire emergency oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ F6-04 Elevator lock oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ F6-05 Service oors 1 0–65535 65535 - ★ F6-06 Service oors 2 0–65535 65535 - ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 114 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-07 Number of elevators in group mode 1–8 1 - ★ F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 1 - ★ F6-09 Elevator program control Bit0: Dispersed waiting Bit2: Parallel implemented at monitoring port Bit3: Parallel implemented at CAN2 Bit4: Parallel control in compatibility with NICE3000 Bit6: Clear oor number and display direction in advance Bit8: Single hall call button Bit10: Err30 judgment at re-leveling cancellation Bit14: Time interval detection of safety circuit 2 and door lock circuit 2 0 - ★ F6-10 Leveling sensor lter time 10–50 14 ms ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 115 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-11 Elevator function selection Bit1: Disabling returning to base oor for verication Bit2: Cancelling auto sequential arrange of hall call oor addresses to be displayed Bit5: Current detection valid at startup for synchronous motor Bit6: Reversing MCB lamp output Bit7: Door open valid at non-door zone in the inspection state Bit8: Door open and close once after inspection turned to normal Bit10: Buzzer not tweet upon re-leveling Bit11: Super short oor function Bit13: Err53 fault auto reset Bit14: Up slow-down not reset for super short oor Bit15: Down slow-down not reset for super short oor 8448 - ★ F6-12 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★ F6-13 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★ F6-14 Start time of down collective selective 1 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-15 End time of down collective selective 1 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-16 Start time of down collective selective 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-17 End time of down collective selective 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-18 Start time of time- based oor service 1 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-19 End time of time-based oor service 1 00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 116 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-20 Service oor 1 of time- based oor service 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-21 Service oor 2 of time- based oor service 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-22 Start time of time- based oor service 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-23 End time of time-based oor service 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-24 Service oor 1 of time- based oor service 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-25 Service oor 2 of time- based oor service 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-26 Peak 1 start time 00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆ F6-27 Peak 1 end time 00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆ F6-28 Peak 1 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ F6-29 Peak 2 start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-30 Peak 2 end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-31 Peak 2 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ F6-35 Service oor 3 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-36 Service oor 3 of time- based oor service 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-37 Service oor 3 of time- based oor service 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-38 Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-39 Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 117 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-40 Program control selection 1 Bit0: Disability function Bit1: Soft limit function Bit2: JP16 input used as back door selection Bit3: JP16 input used as the back door open signal Bit4: Opening only one door of opposite doors under manual control Bit5: Timed elevator lock Bit6: Manual door Bit7: Elevator lock/Fire emergency under hall call at any oor Bit9: Disabling reverse oor number clear Bit10: Displaying next arriving oor number Bit11: Responding to car calls rst Bit12: Car call assisted command in single door used as disability function Bit13: Folding command used as disability function and back door function Bit14: Car call command folding Bit15: JP20 used for switchover to back door 0 - ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 118 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-41 Program control selection 2 Bit2: Inspection to stop due to slow-down 1 Bit4: Buzzer tweet during door open delay Bit6: Cancelling door open delay Bit8: Elevator lock at door open Bit9: Display available at elevator lock Bit10: Elevator lock in the attendant state Bit11: Blinking at arrival (within the time set in F6-47) Bit12: Door re-open during door open delay Bit13: Door re-open after car call of the present oor 0 - ★ F6-42 Program control selection 3 Bit1: Cancelling door open/close command at delay after door open/ close limit Bit2: Not judging door lock state at door close output Bit3: Door close command output during running 0 - ★ F6-43 Attendant function selection bit0: Calls cancelled after entering attendant state bit1: Not responding to hall calls bit2: Attendant/Automatic state switchover bit3: Door close at jogging bit4: Automatic door close bit5: Buzzer tweet at intervals in attendant state bit6: Buzzer tweet at intervals in attendant state 0 - ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 119 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-44 Fire emergency function selection Bit3: Arrival gong output in inspection or re emergency state Bit4: Multiple car calls registered in re emergency state Bit5: Retentive at power failure in re emergency state Bit6: Closing door by holding down the door close button Bit7: Door close at low speed Bit8: Door close at car call registering Bit9: Displaying hall calls in re emergency state Bit11: Exiting re emergency state for reghter Bit14: Opening door by holding down the door open button Bit15: Automatic door open in re emergency oor 16456 - ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 120 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-45 Emergency evacuation function selection Bit0-Bit1: Direction determine mode (00: Automatically calculating direction; 01: Load direction determining; 10: Direction of nearest landing oor) Bit2: Stopping at evacuation parking oor Bit3: Door open at single leveling signal Bit4: Compensation at startup Bit8: Emergency running time protection Bit10: Emergency buzzer output Bit12: Shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive Bit13: Mode of shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive Bit14: Emergency evacuation exit mode Bit15: Function selection of shorting stator braking mode 0 - ★ F6-46 VIP function selection Bit0: VIP enabled by hall call (at VIP oor) Bit1: VIP enabled by terminal Bit8: Number of VIP car calls limited 0 s ★ F6-47 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 0 s ☆ F6-48 Emergency evacuation switching speed 0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s ★ F6-49 Evacuation parking oor 0 to F6-01 0 - ★ Group F7: Test function parameters F7-00 Car call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆ F7-01 Up call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 121 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-02 Down call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆ F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0 - ☆ F7-04 Hall call enabled 0: Yes 1: No 0 - ☆ F7-05 Door open enabled 0: Yes 1: No 0 - ☆ F7-06 Overload function 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0 - ☆ F7-07 Limit switch 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 0 - ☆ F7-08 Time interval of random running 0–1000 0 s ☆ Group F8: Enhanced function parameters F8-00 Load for load cell auto- tuning 0–100 0 % ★ F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0: Pre-torque invalid 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation 2: Automatic pre-torque compensation 0 - ★ F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★ F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★ F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★ F8-05 Current car load 0–1023 0 - ● F8-06 Car no-load load 0–1023 0 - ★ F8-07 Car full-load load 0–1023 100 - ★ F8-08 Anti-nuisance function 0: Anti-nuisance function disabled 1: Nuisance judged by load cell 2: Nuisance judged by light curtain 4: Nuisance judged by light-load signal 0 - ☆ F8-09 Emergency evacuation operation speed at power failure 0.000–0.100 0.050 m/s ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 122 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-10 Emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure 0: Motor not running 1: UPS 2: 48 V battery power supply 0 - ★ F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ☆ F8-12 Fire emergency oor 2 Fire emergency oor 2 0 - ☆ F8-14 HCB communication setting Bit4: Energy saving of HCB communication 0 - ☆ F8-16 Start address of hall call auxiliary command 0–40 0 - ☆ F8-17 Hall call address check 0–1 0 - ☆ Group F9: Time parameters F9-00 Idle time before returning to base oor 0–240 10 min ☆ F9-01 Time for fan and lamp to be turned off 0–240 2 min ☆ F9-02 Motor running time limit 0–45 45 s ★ F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100 Current year YYYY ☆ F9-04 Clock: month 1–12 Current month MM ☆ F9-05 Clock: day 1–31 Current day DD ☆ F9-06 Clock: hour 0–23 Current hour HH ☆ F9-07 Clock: minute 0–59 Current minute MM ☆ F9-09 Accumulative running time 0–65535 0 h ● F9-11 High byte of running times 0–9999 0 - ● F9-12 Low byte or running times 0–9999 0 - ● NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 123 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Group FA: Keypad setting parameters FA-00 Keypad display selection 0: Reversed display of physical oor 1: Positive display of physical oor 2: Reversed display of hall call oor 3: Positive display of hall call oor 3 - ☆ FA-01 Display in running state 1–65535 65535 - ☆ FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 - ☆ FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 Degree (°) ● FA-05 Control board software (ZK) 0–65535 0 - ● FA-06 Drive board software (DSP) 0–65535 0 - ● FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ● FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ● FA-12 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 - ● FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ● FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ● FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m ● FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A ● FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A ● FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ● FA-22 Output torque 0–100 0 % ● FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ● Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 124 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-24 Communication interference 0–65535 0 - ● FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ● FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ● FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ● FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ● FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ● FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ● FA-33 Car input state 0–65535 0 - ● FA-34 Car output state 0–65535 0 - ● FA-35 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ● FA-36 System state 1 0–65535 0 - ● FA-37 System state 2 0–65535 0 - ● FA-46 Hall call communication state 1 0–65535 (oors 1–16) 0 - ● FA-47 Hall call communication state 2 0–65535 (oors 17–32) 0 - ● FA-48 Hall call communication state 3 0–65535 (oors 33–40) 0 - ● Group FB: Door function parameters Fb-00 Number of door machine(s) 1–2 1 - ☆ Fb-01 CTB software 00–999 0 - ● Fb-02 Service oors 1 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-03 Service oors 2 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-04 Service oors 1 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-05 Service oors 2 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-06 Door open protection time 5–99 10 s ☆ Fb-07 Arrival gong output delay 0–1000 0 ms ☆ Fb-08 Door close protection time 5–99 15 s ☆ Fb-09 Door re-open times 0–20 0 - ☆ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 125 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-10 Door state of standby elevator 0: Closing the door as normal at base oor 1: Waiting with door open at base oor 2: Waiting with door open at each oor 0 - ☆ Fb-11 Door open holding time for hall call 1–1000 5 s ☆ Fb-12 Door open holding time for car call 1–1000 3 s ☆ Fb-13 Door open holding time at base oor 1–1000 10 s ☆ Fb-14 Door open delay 10–1000 30 s ☆ Fb-15 Special door open holding time 10–1000 30 s ☆ Fb-16 Manual door open holding time 1–60 5 s ☆ Fb-17 Holding time for forced door close 5–180 120 s ☆ Fb-18 Service oors 3 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-19 Service oors 3 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Group FC: Protection function parameters FC-00 Program control for protection function Bit0: Short-circuit to ground detection at power-on Bit2: Decelerating to stop at valid light curtain Bit9: Mode without door open/close limit 0 - ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 126 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function Bit0: Overload protection Bit1: Canceling protection at output phase loss Bit2: Canceling over- modulation function Bit4: Light curtain judgment at door close limit Bit5: Canceling SPI communication judgment Bit14: Canceling protection at input phase loss 65 - ★ FC-02 Overload protection coefcient 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★ FC-03 Overload pre-warning coefcient 50–100 80 % ★ FC-04 Opposite door selection 0–3 0 - ★ FC-06 Designated fault 0–99 0 - ☆ FC-07 Designated fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-08 Designated fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-09 Designated fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-10 Designated fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-11 Logic information of designated fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-12 Curve information of designated fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-13 Set speed upon designated fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-14 Feedback speed upon designated fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-15 Bus voltage upon designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 v ● FC-16 Current position upon designated fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ● FC-17 Output current upon designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ● NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 127 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-18 Output frequency upon designated fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● FC-19 Torque current upon designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ● FC-20 1st fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-21 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-22 1st fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-23 1st fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-24 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-25 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-26 2nd fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-27 2nd fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-28 3rd fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-29 3rd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-30 3rd fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-31 3rd fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-32 4th fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-33 4th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-34 4th fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-35 4th fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● ··· ● FC-56 10th fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-57 10th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-58 10th fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-59 10th fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-60 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-61 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 128 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-62 Latest fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-63 Latest fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-64 Logic information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-65 Curve information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-66 Set speed upon latest fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-67 Feedback speed upon latest fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-68 Bus voltage upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 v ● FC-69 Current position upon latest fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ● FC-70 Output current upon latest fault 0–999.9 0 A ● FC-71 Output frequency upon latest fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● FC-72 Torque current upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ● Group Fd: Communication parameters FD-00 Baud rate 0: 9600 1: 38400 0 bit/s ★ FD-02 Local address 0–127 0: Broadcast address 1 - ★ FD-03 Communication response delay 0–20 10 ms ★ FD-04 Communication timeout 0.0–60.0 0.0 s ★ FD-05 Re-leveling stop delay 0.00–2.00 0.00 s ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 129 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FD-07 HCB:JP1 input 0: Reserved NO/NC input: 1/33: Elevator lock signal 2/34: Fire emergency signal 3/35: Current oor forbidden 4/36: VIP oor signal 5/37: Security oor signal 6/38: Door close button input 1 - ★ FD-08 HCB:JP2 input 2 - ★ FD-09 HCB:JP1 output 0: Invalid 1: Up arrival indicator 2: Down arrival indicator 3: Fault output 4: Non-door zone stop output 5: Non-service state output 6: Door close button indicator output 1 - ★ FD-10 HCB:JP2 output 2 - ★ FD-11 HCB-B:JP1 input 0: Reserved NO/NC input: 1/33: Light-load signal 2/34: Half-load signal 3/35: Door 2 selection 4/36: Door 2 restricted (back door forbidden) 5/37: Door 1 safety edge 6/38: Door 2 safety edge 7/39: Single/double door selection 0 - ★ FD-12 HCB-B:JP2 input 0 - ★ FD-13 HCB-B:JP3 input 0 - ★ FD-14 HCB-B:JP4 input 0 - ★ FD-15 HCB-B:JP5 input 0 - ★ FD-16 HCB-B:JP6 input 0 - ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 130 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FD-17 HCB-B:A1 output 0: Reserved 1: Fault output 2: Non-door zone stop output 3: Non-service state output 4: Fire emergency output 5: Power failure emergency output 6: Door lock valid 7: Night output signal 0 - ★ FD-18 HCB-B:A2 output 0 - ★ FD-19 HCB-B:B1 output 0 - ★ FD-20 HCB-B:B2 output 0 - ★ FD-21 HCB-B:C1 output 0 - ★ FD-22 HCB-B:C2 output 0 - ★ FD-23 HCB-B:C3 output 0 - ★ FD-24 HCB-B:C4 output 0 - ★ FD-25 HCB-B:C5 output 0 - ★ FD-26 HCB-B:C6 output 0 - ★ Group FE: Elevator function parameters FE-00 Collective selective mode 0: Full collective selective 1: Down collective selective 2: Up collective selective 0 - ★ FE-01 Floor 1 display The two high digits indicate the display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits indicate the display code of the unit's digit. 00: Display "0" 01: Display "1" 02: Display "2" 03: Display "3" 04: Display "4" 05: Display "5" 06: Display "6" 07: Display "7" 08: Display "8" 09: Display "9" 10: Display "A" 11: Display "B" 12: Display "G" 13: Display "H" 14: Display "L" 15: Display "M" 16: Display "P" (To be continued) 1901 - ☆ FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ☆ FE-03 Floor 3 display 1903 - ☆ FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 - ☆ FE-05 Floor 5 display 1905 - ☆ FE-06 Floor 6 display 1906 - ☆ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 131 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FE-07 Floor 7 display 17: Display "R" 18: Display "-" 19: No display 20: Display "12" 21: Display "13" 22: Display "23" 23: Display "C" 24: Display "D" 25: Display "E" 26: Display "F" 27: Display "I" 28: Display "J" 29: Display "K" 30: Display "N" 31: Display "O" 32: Display "Q" 33: Display "S" 34: Display "T" 35: Display "U" 36: Display "V" 37: Display "W" 38: Display "X" 39: Display "Y" 40: Display "Z" 41: Display "15" 42: Display "17" 43: Display "19" (End) 1907 - ☆ FE-08 Floor 8 display 1908 - ☆ FE-09 Floor 9 display 1909 - ☆ FE-10 Floor 10 display 0100 - ☆ FE-11 Floor 11 display 0101 - ☆ FE-12 Floor 12 display 0102 - ☆ FE-13 Floor 13 display 0103 - ☆ FE-14 Floor 14 display 0104 - ☆ FE-15 Floor 15 display 0105 - ☆ Floor 16 to oor 30 display FE-31 Floor 31 display 0301 - ☆ FE-35 Floor 32 display 0 - ☆ FE-36 Floor 33 display 0 - ☆ FE-37 Floor 34 display 0 - ☆ FE-38 Floor 35 display 0 - ☆ FE-39 Floor 36 display 0 - ☆ FE-40 Floor 37 display 0 - ☆ FE-41 Floor 38 display 0 - ☆ FE-42 Floor 39 display 0 - ☆ FE-43 Floor 40 display 0 - ☆ FE-52 Highest digit selection 1 0 - ☆ FE-53 Highest digit selection 2 0 - ☆ FE-54 Highest digit selection 3 0 - ☆ FE-55 Highest digit selection 4 0 - ☆ FE-56 Highest digit selection 5 0 - ☆ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 132 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FE-32 Elevator function selection 1 Bit2: Re-leveling function Bit3: Door pre-open function Bit4: Stuck hall call cancellation Bit5: Night security oor function Bit6: Down collective selective peak service Bit7: Parallel peak service Bit8: Time-based service oor function Bit9: VIP function Bit11: Car call deletion Bit12: Hall call deletion Bit15: Door lock short- circuit detection 34816 - ☆ FE-33 Elevator function selection 2 Bit1: Door open holding at open limit Bit2: Door close command not output upon door close limit Bit4: Auto reset for RUN and brake contactor stuck Bit5: Slow-down switch stuck detection Bit7: Forced door close Bit8: NO shorting motor stator contactor Bit9: Immediate stop upon re-leveling Bit13: High-speed elevator protection function Bit15: Opposite door independent control 36 - ☆ Group Fr: Leveling adjustment parameters Fr-00 Leveling adjustment function 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0 - ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Function Code Table - 133 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fr-01 Leveling adjustment record 1 00000–60060 30030 mm ★ Fr-02 Leveling adjustment record 2 30030 mm ★ … … Fr-20 Leveling adjustment record 20 30030 mm ★ Group FF: Factory parameters Group FP: User parameters FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 - ☆ FP-01 Parameter update 0: No operation 1: Restore default settings 2: Clear fault records 0 - ★ FP-02 User-dened parameter display 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0 - ★ Function Code Table NICE3000 new User Manual - 134 - 7 Description of Function Codes Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 136 - Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes Group F0: Basic Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-00 Control mode • 0: Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) • 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) • 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control 1 - ★ It is used to set the control mode of the system. • 0: Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) It is applicable to low-speed running during no-load commissioning of the asynchronous motor, fault judgment at inspection, and synchronous motor running on special conditions. • 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) It is applicable to normal running in distance control. • 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control It is applicable to equipment detection where the ratio between the voltage and the frequency is xed, control is simple, and the low-frequency output torque feature is poor. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-01 Command source selection 0: Operation panel control 1: Distance control 1 - ★ It is used to set the source of running commands and running speed references. • 0: Operation panel control The controller is operated by pressing RUN and STOP RES on the operation panel, and the running speed is set by F0-02 (Running speed under operation panel control). This method is applicable only to the test or motor no-load auto-tuning. • 1: Distance control This method is used in the NICE series integrated elevator controller. During inspection, the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-11. During normal running, the controller automatically calculates the speed and running curve for the elevator based on the distance between the current oor and the target oor within the rated elevator speed, implementing direct stop. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 137 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-02 Running speed under operation panel control 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆ It is used to set the running speed in the operation panel control mode. Note that this function is enabled only when F0-01 is set to 0 (Operation panel control). You can change the running speed of the elevator by modifying this parameter during running Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-03 Maximum running speed 0.250 to F0-04 1.600 m/s ★ It is used to set the actual maximum running speed of the elevator. The value must be smaller than the rated elevator speed. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.250–4.000 1.600 m/s ★ It is used to set the norminal rated speed of the elevator. The value of this parameter is dependent on the elevator mechanism and traction motor. Note F0-03 is the actual running speed within the elevator speed range set in F0-04. For example, for a certain elevator, if F0-04 is 1.750 m/s and the actually required maximum running speed is 1.600 m/s, set F0-03 to 1.600 m/s. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-05 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg ★ It is used to set the rated elevator load. This parameter is used for the anti-nuisance function. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-06 Maximum frequency 20.00–99.00 50.00 Hz ★ It is used to set the maximum output frequency of the system. This value must be larger than the rated motor frequency. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F0-07 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz ★ It is used to set the carrier frequency of the controller. The carrier frequency is closely related to the motor noise during running. When it is generally set above 6 kHz, mute running is achieved. It is recommended to set the carrier frequency to the lowest within the allowable noise, which reduces the controller loss and radio frequency interference. • If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonics, and the power loss and temperature rise of the motor increase. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 138 - • If the carrier frequency is high, power loss and temperature rise of the motor declines. However, the system has an increase in power loss, temperature rise and interference. Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert inuences on the aspects listed in the following table. Table 7-1 Inuences of carrier frequency adjustment Carrier frequency Low High Motor noise Large Small Output current waveform Bad Good Motor temperature rise High Low Controller temperature rise Low High Leakage current Small Large External radiation interference Small Large Note On certain environment conditions (the heatsink temperature is too high), the system will reduce the carrier frequency to provide overheat protection for the controller, preventing the controller from being damaged due to overheat. If the temperature cannot reduce in this case, the controller reports the overheat fault. Group F1: Motor Parameter Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-00 Encoder type 0: SIN/COS encoder 1: UVW encoder 2: ABZ incremental encoder 0 - ★ It is used to set the encoder type matching the motor. When F1-25 is set to 1 (Synchronous motor), set this parameter correctly before auto- tuning; otherwise, the motor cannot run properly. When F1-25 is set to 0 (Asynchronous motor), this parameter is automatically changed to 2. You need not modify it manually. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0 Model dependent kW ★ F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–600 Model dependent V ★ F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00 Model dependent A ★ F1-04 Rated motor frequency 0.00–99.00 Model dependent Hz ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 139 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-05 Rated motor rotational speed 0–3000 Model dependent RPM ★ Set these parameters according to the motor nameplate. Ensure that these motor parameters are set correctly. Incorrect setting affects the motor auto-tuning and the vector control effect. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-06 Encoder initial angle (synchronous motor) 0.0–359.9 0 Degree (°) ★ F1-07 Encoder angle at power- off (synchronous motor) 0.0–359.9 0 Degree (°) ★ F1-08 Synchronous motor wiring mode 0–15 0 - ★ These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. F1-06 species the encoder angle at zero point. After multiple times of auto-tuning, compare the obtained values, and the value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°. F1-07 species the angle of the magnetic pole when the motor is powered off. The value is recorded at power-off and is used for comparison at next power-on. F1-08 species the motor wiring mode, that is, whether the output phase sequence of the drive board is consistent with the UVW phase sequence of the motor. If the value obtained by means of no-load auto-tuning is an even number, the phase sequence is correct. If the value is an odd number, the sequence is incorrect; in this case, exchange any two of UWW phases of the motor. Note With-load auto-tuning of the synchronous motor can be performed only when the UVW phase sequence of the motor is consistent with the output phase sequence of the controller. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-09 Current lter time (synchronous motor) 0–40 0 - ★ It is used to set the current lter time, which suppress the periodic vertical jitter. Increase the value in ascending order of 3 to achieve the optimum effect. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-10 Encoder verication selection 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to set encoder signal verication. This parameter is set by the manufacturer, and you need not modify it generally. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 140 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 0: No operation 1: With-load auto-tuning 2: No-load auto-tuning 3: Shaft auto-tuning 0 - ★ It is used to select the auto-tuning mode. "With-load auto-tuning" is static auto-tuning for the asynchronous motor and rotary auto- tuning for the synchronous motor. "No-load auto-tuning" is complete auto-tuning, by which all motor parameters can be obtained. When F1-11 is set to 2 (No-load auto-tuning), the motor must be completely disconnected from the load; otherwise, the auto-tuning effect will be affected. When TUNE is displayed on the operation panel, you need to manually release the brake before starting auto-tuning. For details on the auto-tuning process, see the description in section 5.1.3. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000 2048 PPR ★ It is used to set the pulses per revolution of the encoder (according to the encoder nameplate). This parameter is critical to CLVC. Set the encoder nominal value in this parameter. Otherwise, the elevator may not run properly. When the feedback pulses received by the system is data after frequency division by other equipment, set the frequency-division value rather than the encoder nominal value in this parameter. For example, if the pulses per revolution of the encoder is 8192 and is sent to the system after 1/4 frequency division, set this parameter to 2048 (8192/4 = 2048). Note F0-04 (Rated elevator speed), F1-05 (Rated motor rotational speed), and F1-12 (Encoder pulses per revolution) determine whether the elevator can run properly. If any of these parameters is changed, shaft auto-tuning must be performed again. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-13 Encoder wire-breaking detection time 0–10.0 1.0 s ★ This parameter is used to set the time that a wire-break fault lasts before being detected. After the elevator starts running at non-zero speed, if there is no encoder signal input within the time set in this parameter, the system prompts the encoder fault and stops running. When the value is smaller than 0.5s, this function is disabled. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-14 Stator resistance (asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model dependent Ω ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 141 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-15 Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor) 0.000–30.000 Model dependent Ω ★ F1-16 Leakage inductance (asynchronous motor) 0.00–300.00 Model dependent mH ★ F1-17 Mutual inductance (asynchronous motor) 0.1–3000.0 Model dependent mH ★ F1-18 Magnetizing current (asynchronous motor) 0.01–300.00 Model dependent A ★ These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. After the motor auto-tuning is completed successfully, the values of these parameters are updated automatically. If motor auto-tuning cannot be performed onsite, manually enter the values by referring to data of the motor with the same nameplate parameters. Each time F1-01 (Rated motor power) of the asynchronous motor is modified, these parameters automatically resume to the default values for the standard motor. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-19 Shaft Q inductance (torque) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★ F1-20 Shaft D inductance (excitation) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★ F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★ These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F1-25 Motor type 0: Asynchronous motor 1: Synchronous motor 1 - ★ It is used to set the motor type. This parameter must be set correctly before motor auto- tuning; otherwise, the motor auto-tuning cannot be performed. Group F2: Vector Control Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 - ★ F2-01 Speed loop integral time TI1 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★ F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★ F2-00 and F2-01 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is smaller than the value of F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1). Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain KP2 0–100 35 - ★ F2-04 Speed loop integral time TI2 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★ F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz ★ Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 142 - F2-03 and F2-04 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is larger than the value of F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2). If the running frequency is between F2-02 and F2-05, the speed loop PI parameters are obtained from the weighted average value of the two groups of PI parameters (F2-00, F2-01 and F2-03, F2-04), as shown in Figure 7-1. Figure 7-1 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters Frequency reference PI parameters F2-00 F2-01 F2-03 F2-04 F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator. To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time. Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation. The recommended adjustment method is as follows: If the default setting cannot meet the requirements, make proper adjustment. Increase the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot. If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are 0, only F2- 03 and F2-04 are valid. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-06 Current loop KP1 (torque) 10–500 60 - ★ F2-07 Current loop KI1 (torque) 10–500 30 - ★ These two parameters are regulation parameters for the torque axis current loop. These parameters are used as the torque axis current regulator in vector control. The best values of the parameters matching the motor characteristics are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them generally. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★ It is used to set the torque upper limit of the motor. The value 100% corresponds to the rated output torque of the adaptable motor. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-10 Elevator running direction 0–3 0 - ★ NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 143 - It is used to set the elevator running direction. The values are as follows: • 0: Running direction and position pulse direction unchanged • 1: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction reversed • 2: Running direction unchanged, position pulse direction reversed • 3: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction unchanged You can modify this parameter to reverse the running direction (without changing the wiring of the motor) and position pulse direction (pulse direction for determining the elevator position in F4-03). For example, if inspection on the up direction needs to be performed after the elevator is installed, but the elevator is in down direction, you need to reverse the running direction; if the pulses indicated by F4-03 decrease (that is, down direction) during inspection up, you need to reverse the position pulse direction. The correct directions are as follows: During inspection up, the car moves upward, and the pulses indicated by F4-03 increase; during inspection down, the car moves downward, and the pulses indicated by F4-03 decrease. Pay attention to the setting of this parameter when restoring the default setting. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-11 Zero servo current coefcient 0.20–50.0 15 % ★ F2-12 Zero servo speed loop KP 0.00–2.00 0.5 - ★ F2-13 Zero servo speed loop KI 0.00–2.00 0.6 - ★ These parameters are used to adjust automatic pre-torque compensation in the case of no- load-cell. The no-load-cell startup function is enabled when F8-01 is set to 2. Decrease the values of these parameters in the case of car lurch at startup, and increase the values in the case of rollback at startup. For details, see the description of section 5.1.5. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-16 Torque acceleration time 1–500 1 ms ★ F2-17 Torque deceleration time 1–500 350 ms ★ These two parameters are used to set the acceleration time and deceleration time of the torque current. Due to different characteristics, the motor may have an abnormal sound when the current is withdrawn at stop. In this case, you can increase the torque deceleration time properly to eliminate the abnormal sound. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F2-18 Startup acceleration time 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★ It is used to set the acceleration time of the startup speed. It is used with F3-00. For details, see Figure 7-2. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 144 - Group F3: Running Control Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★ F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s ★ These two parameters are used to set the startup speed and startup speed holding time. For details, see Figure 7-2. The parameters may reduce the terrace feeling at startup due to static friction between the guide rail and the guide shoes. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s 2 ★ F3-03 Acceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ F3-04 Acceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ These parameters are used to set the running curve during acceleration of the elevator. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s 2 ★ F3-06 Deceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ F3-07 Deceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★ These parameters are used to set the running curve during deceleration of the elevator. • F3-02 (F3-05) is the acceleration rate (deceleration rate) in the straight-line acceleration process (deceleration process) of the S curve. • F3-03 (F3-07) is the time for the rate to increase from 0 to the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) in the end jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is. • F3-04 (F3-06) is the time for the rate to decrease from the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) to 0 in the start jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is. Figure 7-2 Setting the running curve t (time) V (speed) F3-04 F3-02 F3-03 F3-09 F3-07 F3-05 F3-06 F2-18 F3-00 F3-01 NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 145 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-08 Special deceleration rate 0.500–2.000 0.900 m/s 2 ★ It is used to set the deceleration rate in elevator slow-down, inspection, and shaft auto-tuning. This parameter is not used during normal running. It is used only when the elevator position is abnormal or the slow-down signal is abnormal, preventing over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-09 Pre-deceleration distance 0–90.0 0.0 mm ★ It is used to set the pre-deceleration distance of the elevator in distance control, as shown in Figure 7-2. This function is to eliminate the effect of encoder signal loss or leveling signal delay. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s ★ is used to set the elevator speed during re-leveling. This parameter is valid only when the pre-open module (MCTC-SCB-A) is added to implement the re-leveling function (set in FE-32). Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.630 0.250 m/s ★ It is used to set the elevator speed during inspection and shaft auto-tuning. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-12 Position of up slow-down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-13 Position of down slow-down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-14 Position of up slow-down 2 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-15 Position of down slow-down 2 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-16 Position of up slow-down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ F3-17 Position of down slow-down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★ These parameters specify the positions of all slow-down switches relative to the bottom leveling position, and the positions are automatically recorded during shaft auto-tuning. For the installation positions of the slow-down switches, see the description of section 3.8.2. The NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller supports a maximum of three pairs of slow- down switches. From two sides of the shaft to the middle, slow-down 1, slow-down 2, and slow-down 3 are installed in order; that is, slow-down 1 is installed near the terminal oor. There may be only one pair of slow-sown switches for the low-speed elevator, and two or three pairs of slow-down switches for the high-speed elevator. The system automatically detects the speed when the elevator reaches a slow-down switch. If the detected speed or position is abnormal, the system enables the elevator to slow down at the special deceleration rate set in F3-08, preventing over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 146 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-18 Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★ F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ★ F3-20 Zero-speed control time at end 0.200–1.500 0.200 s ★ These parameters are used to set the time related to the zero-speed holding current output and braking action delay. • F3-18 (Zero-speed control time at startup) species the time from output of the RUN contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation on the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque. • F3-19 (Brake release delay) species the time from the moment when the system sends the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released, during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output. • F3-20 (Zero-speed control time at end) species the zero-speed output time when the running curve ends. • F8-11 (Brake apply delay) species the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output. Figure 7-3 Running time sequence V (speed) t (time) F3-18 F3-19 F8-11 F3-20 300 ms RUN contactor Brake contactor Shorting door lock circuit contactor Shorting motor stator contactor Internal running status Leveling signal RUN contactor feedback Brake contactor feedback Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback Shorting motor stator contactor Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F3-21 Low-speed re-leveling speed 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★ It is used to set the elevator speed of returning to the leveling position at normal non-leveling stop. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 147 - Group F4: Floor Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★ It is used to adjust the leveling accuracy at elevator stop. If over-leveling occurs in elevator stop at all oors, decrease the value of this parameter properly. If under-leveling occurs in elevator stop at all oors, increase the value of this parameter properly. This parameter takes effect to leveling of all oors. Therefore, if leveling at a single oor is inaccurate, adjust the position of the leveling plate. The NICE3000 new has the advanced distance control algorithm and adopts many methods to ensure reliability of direct stop. Generally you need not modify this parameter. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F4-01 Current oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ This parameter indicates the current oor of the elevator car. The system automatically changes the value of this parameter during running, and corrects it at leveling position (door open limit) after the up slow-down and down slow-down switches act. At non-bottom oor and top-oor leveling, you can also manually modify this parameter, but the value must be consistent with the actual current oor. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F4-02 High byte of current oor position 0–65535 1 Pulses ● F4-03 Low byte of current oor position 0–65535 34464 Pulses ● These two parameters indicate the absolute pulses of the current position of the elevator car relative to the bottom leveling position. The position data of the NICE3000 new in the shaft is recorded in pulses. Each position is expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the oor position, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the oor position. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F4-04 Length 1 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm ★ F4-05 Length 2 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm ★ These two parameters respectively indicate the pulses corresponding to the length of the magnetic value and the length between two leveling sensors. They are automatically recorded during shaft auto-tuning. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F4-06 High byte of oor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-07 Low byte of oor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ …(Floor height 2 to oor height 38) F4-82 High byte of oor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ F4-83 Low byte of oor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses ★ Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 148 - These parameters indicate the pulses corresponding to the floor height i (between the leveling plates of oor n and oor i+1). Each oor height is expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the oor height, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the oor height. On normal conditions, the oor height i of each oor is almost the same. Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-00 Attendant/Automatic switchover time 3–200 3 s ★ If there is a hall call at current oor in attendant state, the system automatically switches over to the automatic (normal) state after the time set in this parameter. After this running is completed, the system automatically restores to the attendant state (BIT2 of F6-43 must be set to 1). When the value of this parameter is smaller than 5, this function is disabled, and the system is in the normal attendant state. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-01 X1 function selection 0–127 33 - ★ F5-02 X2 function selection 35 - ★ F5-03 X3 function selection 34 - ★ … ··· F5-23 X23 function selection 00 - ★ F5-24 X24 function selection 00 - ★ These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals X1 to X24. Note Functions 04/36 (Safety circuit feedback NO/NC input), 05/37 (Door lock circuit feedback NO/NC input), 06/38 (Main contactor feedback NO/NC input), 07/39 (Brake feedback contactor NO/NC input), 26/58 (Brake contactor feedback 2 NO/NC input) can be repeatedly allocated to the input terminals. Terminals X1 to X24 are digital inputs, and are allocated with corresponding functions based on the input signals. All these terminals share the COM terminal. After the 24 V voltage is input, the corresponding input terminal indicator becomes ON. The functions are described as follows: 00: Invalid Even if there is signal input to the terminal, the system has no response. You can allocate this function to terminals that are not used to prevent mis-function. 01: Up leveling signal 02: Down leveling signal 03: Door zone signal The NICE3000 new system determines the elevator leveling position based on the leveling sensor signal. The system supports three types of leveling conguration: single door zone sensor, up/down leveling sensor, and door zone sensor plus the up/down leveling sensor. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 149 - If three leveling sensors are used, the system receives the up leveling signal, door zone signal, and down leveling signal in sequence in the up direction, and receives down leveling signal, door zone signal, and up leveling signal in sequence in the down direction. If two leveling sensors (up leveling sensor and down leveling sensor) are used, the system receives the up leveling signal and down leveling signal in sequence in the up direction, and receives down leveling signal and up leveling signal in sequence in the down direction. If the leveling signal is abnormal (stuck or unavailable), the system reports fault Err22. 04: Safety circuit feedback signal 05: Door lock circuit feedback signal 29: Safety circuit 2 feedback signal 31: Door lock circuit 2 feedback signal The safety circuit is important to safe and reliable running of the elevator, and the door lock circuit ensures that the hall door and car door are closed before the elevator starts to run. Valid feedback signals of the safety circuit and door lock circuit are necessary to elevator running. It is recommended that these signals are set to NO input. If they are set to NC input, the system considers the input active even though there is no input. In this case, the actual state of the safety circuit cannot be detected, which may cause potential safety risks. 06: RUN contactor feedback signal 07: Brake contactor feedback signal 26: Brake contactor feedback 2 signal The system sends commands to the RUN and brake contactors and automatically detects the feedback from the RUN and brake contactors. If the commands and the feedback are inconsistent, the system reports a fault. 08: Inspection signal 09: Inspection up signal 1 0 : I n s p e c t i o n d o w n signal When the Automatic/Inspection switch is set to the Inspection position, the elevator enters the inspection state; in this case, the system cancels all automatic running including the automatic door operations. When the inspection up signal or inspection down signal is valid, the elevator runs at the inspection speed. 11: Fire emergency signal When the re emergency switch is turned on, the elevator enters the re emergency state, and immediately cancels the registered hall calls and car calls. The elevator stops at the nearest oor without opening the door, and then directly runs to the re emergency oor and automatically opens the door after arrival. 12: Up limit signal 13: Down limit signal The up limit signal and down limit signal are used as the stop switches at the terminal oor to prevent over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal when the elevator runs over the leveling position of the terminal oor but does not stop. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 150 - 14: Overload signal When the elevator load exceeds 110% of the rated load during normal use, the elevator enters the overload state. Then the overload buzzer beeps, the overload indicator in the car becomes ON, and the elevator door keeps open. The overload signal becomes invalid when the door lock is applied. If the running with 110% of the rated load is required during inspection, you can set F7-06 to 1 to allow overload running (note that this function has potential safety risks and use it with caution). It is recommended that the overload signal be set to NC input. If it is set to NO, the system cannot detect the overload state when the overload switch is damaged or the connection is broken, and the elevator running in this case may cause potential safety risks. It is also recommended that the up limit signal, down limit signal, and slow-down signal are set to NC. 15: Full-load signal When the elevator load is 80% to 110% of the rated load, the HOP displays the full-load state, and the elevator does not respond to hall calls. Note When terminal X on the MCB is used for input of the overload and full-load signals, ensure that F5-36 has been set to 0. 16: Up slow-down 1 signal 17: Down slow-down 1 signal 18: Up slow-down 2 signal 19: Down slow-down 2 signal 20: Up slow-down 3 signal 21: Down slow-down 3 signal The slow-down signals are used to enable the elevator to stop at the slow-down speed when the car position is abnormal, which is an important method to guarantee elevator safety. The system automatically records the positions of the switches in group F3 during shaft auto- tuning. 22: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback It is the feedback signal when the door lock circuit is shorted at enabling of the function of door pre-open upon arrival or re-leveling at door open for the elevator congured with the pre-open module. This is to ensure safety during the elevator running. 23: Fireghter switch signal It is the firefighter switch signal and is used to enable the firefighter running. After the elevator returns to the re emergency oor, the elevator enters the reghter running state if the reghter signal is active. 24: Door machine 1 light curtain signal; 25: Door machine 2 light curtain signal They are used to detect the light curtain signals of door machine 1 and door machine 2 (if existing). NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 151 - 27: UPS valid signal It is the emergency running signal at power failure. If it is active, it indicates that the elevator is running for emergency evacuation at power failure. For more details, see section 5.2.1. 28: Elevator lock signal If this signal is active, the elevator enters the locked state, returns to the elevator lock oor and does not respond to any calls until the signal becomes inactive. It has the same function as the hall call elevator lock signal. 30: Shorting PMSM stator feedback signal The shorting PMSM stator contactor protects the elevator from falling at high speed in the case of brake failure. This signal is used to monitor whether the shorting PMSM stator contactor is normal. 65: Door machine 1 safety edge signal; 66: Door machine 2 safety edge signal They are used to detect the safety edge signal state of door machine 1 and door machine 2 (if existing). 67: Motor overheat signal If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the controller stops output and reports fault Err39 to prompt motor overheat. After this signal becomes inactive, Err39 is reset automatically and the system resumes to normal operation. 68: Earthquake signal If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the elevator enters the earthquake stop state, stops at the nearest landing oor and opens the door. Then the elevator starts running again after the earthquake signal becomes inactive. 69: Back door forbidden signal If double door machines are applied, it is used to prohibit the use of door machine 2. 70: Light-load signal It is used for nuisance judgment in the anti-nuisance function. If Bit2 in F8-08 is set to 1, the system performs nuisance judgment by using the light-load switch. 30% of rated load is regarded as light load. 71: Half-load signal It is used for allocation of elevators in parallel or group mode and judgment of the emergency running direction at power failure. 72: Fire emergency oor switchover signal The NICE3000 new supports two re emergency oors. By default, the elevator stops at re Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 152 - emergency oor 1 in re emergency state. If this signal is active, the elevator stops at re emergency oor 2 in re emergency state. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-25 CTB input type 0–511 320 - ★ It is used to dene the input signal type (NO/NC) of the CTB by binary bit. For example, the input signal types of the CTB of an elevator are set as follows: Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default Bit0 Door machine 1 light curtain 0 Bit5 Door machine 2 close limit 0 Bit1 Door machine 2 light curtain 0 Bit6 Full-load signal (digital) 1 Bit2 Door machine 1 open limit 0 Bit7 Over-load signal (digital) 0 Bit3 Door machine 2 open limit 0 Bit8 Light-load signal (digital) 1 Bit4 Door machine 1 close limit 0 0: NC input; 1: NO input Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-26 Y1 function selection 0–31 1 - ★ F5-27 Y2 function selection 2 - ★ F5-28 Y3 function selection 3 - ★ F5-29 Y4 function selection 4 - ★ F5-30 Y5 function selection 0 - ★ F5-31 Y6 function selection 0 - ★ These parameters are used to set the functions of relay output terminals Y1 to Y6. 00: Invalid The terminal has no function. 01: RUN contactor control; 02: Brake contactor control; 03: Shorting door lock circuit contactor control The terminal with one of these functions controls whether the contactor is opened or closed. 04: Fire emergency oor arrival signal feedback In the re emergency state, the system sends the feedback signal for monitoring after the elevator stops at the re emergency oor. 05: Door machine 1 open; 06: Door machine 1 close; 07: Door machine 2 open; 08: Door machine 2 close The terminal with one of these functions is used to control open/close of door 1/2. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 153 - 09: Brake and RUN contactors healthy When the brake and RUN contactors operate properly (non-Err36/Err37 state), the system sends the feedback signal for monitoring. 10: Fault state The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the level-3, level-4 or level-5 fault state. 11: Running monitor The terminal with the function has output when the controller is running. 12: Shorting PMSM stator contactor When the shorting PMSM stator contactor is applied in synchronous motor, the terminal with the function is used to control whether the contactor is closed or opened. For details, see section 5.2.1. 13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover When detecting that the bus voltage declines to a certain value after power failure occurs on the mains supply, the controller outputs this signal and uses the battery for temporary power supply, implementing emergency evacuation running. Only Y6/M6 can be allocated with this function because the controller needs to depend on its residual power to drive the relay at power failure of the mains supply. 14: System healthy The terminal with the function has output when the system operates properly. 15: Emergency buzzer control The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the emergency evacuation running state. The buzzer tweets to prompt. 16: High-voltage startup of brake This function is used for the brake that keeps the release state with voltage reduction. The terminal with this function keeps the output for 4s to release the brake, and then the voltage is reduced to keep the brake release state. 17: Elevator running in up direction The terminal with the function has output when the elevator runs in the up direction. 18: Lamp/Fan running It is used for the lamp/fan running output, the same as the energy saving control output of the CTB. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 154 - 19: Medical sterilization It is used to control the output of the ultraviolet sterilizing lamp signal. After the elevator stops running and the lamp/fan stops operating, the medical sterilization output is started. 20: Non-door zone stop The terminal with this function has output when the elevator stops at the non-door zone. 21: Electric lock It is used to control applying and releasing of the electric lock in the case of manual door. 22: Non-service state It is output when the elevator is in the non-service state and cannot respond to hall calls. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-32 Communication state display Monitoring of CANbus and Modbus communication states - - ● It is used to monitor the state of CANbus communication with the CTB and Modbus communication with the HOP. When you enter the menu of F5-32, the LEDs on the operation panel indicate the current HOP communication state. The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. Figure 7-4 Communication state monitoring 12345 A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP Monitoring CANbus communication status between the CTB and the MCB Monitoring Modbus communication status between the HOPs at all floors and the MCB Each segment of the LEDs is dened in the following table. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 155 - Table 7-2 Denition of LED segments LED No. Corresponding Normal Modbus Communication Address of LED Meaning of Segment ON A B C D E F G DP HOP Modbus Communication Normal 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C DP D E F G 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved LED No. Corresponding Abnormal Modbus Communication Address of LED Meaning of Segment OFF A B C D E F G DP HOP Modbus Communication Abnormal 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C DP D E F G 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved LED No. CTB CANbus Communication State Number Displayed by the LED 5 Communication status from strong to weak Best communication status Communication interrupted A B C DP D E F G For example, if the LEDs are shown as the following gure, it indicates that the Modbus communication of addresses 1, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26 and 27 are abnormal. The Modbus communication of other addresses is normal. The CANbus communication state displayed by the LED is 3, indicating normal communication. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 156 - Figure 7-5 Example of LED display indicating the communication state 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-33 Terminal program control 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to set the elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated by a binary bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. Table 7-3 Functions indicated by bits of F5-33 Bit Function Description Default Bit3 Elevator re emergency requirement for Hong Kong If it is enabled, the re emergency functions in F6-44 applied to Hong Kong become enabled automatically. 0 Bit4 Arrival gong disabled at night The arrival gong is disabled from 22:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. 0 Bit6 Door lock disconnected at inspection switched over to normal running The door lock is additionally disconnected once when the inspection state is switched over to the normal running state. 0 Bit7 Fault code not displayed on the keypad The keypad does not blink to display the fault code. 0 Bit8 Door open command cancelled immediately at door open limit The system immediately cancels the door open command after receiving the door open limit. 0 Bit9 Car stop and zero-speed torque holding at abnormal brake feedback When the brake feedback is abnormal, the elevator arrives at the door-zone position and stops. The door keeps closed, and the system holds torque output as long as possible. After the system is over-loaded, there is no torque output, and the elevator may fall in this case. Be cautious of using this function. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-34 Terminal state display Monitoring of I/O terminals on MCB - - ● F5-35 Terminal state display Monitoring of I/O terminals on CTB, CCB and HOP - - ● NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 157 - These parameters are used to monitor the state of all I/O terminals of the system. The LEDs of F5-34/F5-35 are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. Figure 7-6 Monitoring of all I/O terminals 12345 A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP A B C D E F G DP Each segment of the LEDs is dened in the following table. Table 7-4 Denition of LED segments F5-34 F5-35 No. Segment Indication No. Segment Indication 1 A - 1 A Light curtain 1 B Up leveling signal B Light curtain 2 C Down leveling signal C Door 1 open limit D Door zone signal D Door 2 open limit E Safety circuit feedback 1 E Door 1 close limit F Door lock circuit feedback 1 F Door 2 close limit G RUN contactor feedback G Full-load signal DP Brake contactor feedback 1 DP Overload signal 2 A Inspection signal 2 A Door open button B Inspection up signal B Door close button C Inspection down signal C Door open delay button D Fire emergency signal D Bypass signal E Up limit signal E Attendant signal F Down limit signal F Direction change signal G Overload signal G Independent running signal DP Full-load signal DP Fireghter operation signal Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 158 - F5-34 F5-35 No. Segment Indication No. Segment Indication 3 A Up slow-down 1 signal 3 A Door open output 1 B Down slow-down 1 signal B Door close output 1 C Up slow-down 2 signal C Door lock signal D Down slow-down 2 signal D Door open output 1 E Up slow-down 3 signal E Door close output 2 F Down slow-down 3 signal F Door lock signal G Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback G Up arrival gong DP Fireghter running signal DP Down arrival gong 4 A Door machine 1 light curtain 4 A Door open button display B Door machine 2 light curtain B Door close button display C Brake contactor feedback 2 C Door open delay button display D UPS input D Non-door zone stop E Elevator lock input E Reserved F Safety circuit feedback 2 F Buzzer output G Shorting PMSM stator contactor feedback G Reserved DP Door lock circuit feedback 2 DP Energy saving sign 5 A Reserved 5 A System light curtain state 1 B RUN contactor output B System light curtain state 2 C Brake contactor output C Hall call elevator lock input D Shorting door lock circuit contactor control D Hall call re emergency input E Fire emergency oor arrival signal E Full-load signal F - F Over-load signal DP - DP - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-36 Load cell input selection 0–3 1 - ★ It is used to set the channel of setting the elevator load cell signal. When a load cell device is used, set this parameter correctly rst. The values are as follows: • 0: Invalid • 1: CTB digital input • 2: CTB analog input • 3: MCB analog input NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 159 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F5-37 X25 function selection 0: No function 4: Safety circuit signal 5: Door lock circuit signal 0 - ★ F5-38 X26 function selection 0 - ★ F5-39 X27 function selection 0 - ★ These parameters are used to set the functions of heavy-current detection input terminals X25 to X27. The functions 0, 4, and 5 can be repeatedly allocated to terminals. If X25 to X27 are not used, cancel the setting of these parameters. Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-00 Top oor of the elevator F6-01 to 40 9 - ★ F6-01 Bottom oor of the elevator 1 to F6-00 1 - ★ These two parameters are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator, determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-02 Parking oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the value set in F9-00, the elevator returns to the parking oor automatically. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-03 Fire emergency oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ When entering the state of returning to the re emergency oor, the elevator returns to this oor. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-04 Elevator lock oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ When entering the elevator lock state, the elevator returns to this oor. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-05 Service oors 1 0–65535 (oors 1–16) 65535 - ★ F6-06 Service oors 2 0–65535 (oors 17–32) 65535 - ★ F6-35 Service oors 3 0–65535 (oors 33–40) 65535 - ★ These parameters are used to set the service floors among floors 1–40. F6-05 (Service oors 1) corresponds to oors 1–16. F6-06 (Service oors 2) corresponds to oors 17–32. F6-35 (Service oors 3) corresponds to oors 33–40. Set these parameters as follows: Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 160 - Whether service oors of a parameter are allowed is indicated by a 16-bit binary number. The 16 bits respectively correspond to 16 floors from low to high. "1" indicates that the elevator will respond to calls of this oor, and "0" indicates that the elevator will not respond to calls of this oor. For example, the service oors of a 16-oor elevator are listed in the following table. Table 7-5 Service oors of a 16-oor elevator Bit Floor Whether Service Setting Bit Floor Whether Service Setting Bit0 Floor 1 Allowed 1 Bit8 Floor 9 Forbidden 0 Bit1 Floor 2 Forbidden 0 Bit9 Floor 10 Allowed 1 Bit2 Floor 3 Allowed 1 Bit10 Floor 11 Allowed 1 Bit3 Floor 4 Allowed 1 Bit11 Floor 12 Forbidden 0 Bit4 Floor 5 Allowed 1 Bit12 Floor 13 Allowed 1 Bit5 Floor 6 Allowed 1 Bit13 Floor 14 Allowed 1 Bit6 Floor 7 Allowed 1 Bit14 Floor 15 Allowed 1 Bit7 Floor 8 Forbidden 0 Bit15 Floor 16 Allowed 1 The binary number indicated by the preceding table is 1111011001111101. The decimal equivalent of this binary number is 63101. Then set F6-05 to 63101. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-07 Number of elevators in group mode 1–8 1 - ★ F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 1 - ★ These parameters are used to set the number of elevators and elevator No. in group/parallel mode. Note • If F6-07 is set to 1, the setting of F6-08 becomes invalid. • Elevator No.1 is the master elevator in parallel mode and completes the most parallel logics. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-09 Elevator program control 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to select the required elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated by a binary bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 161 - Table 7-6 Functions indicated by bits of F6-09 Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Dispersed waiting In single elevator or parallel mode, if this function is enabled, an idle elevator will not return to the base oor. In group mode, this function is used together with the group control board to implement dispersed waiting. 0 Bit2 Parallel implemented at monitoring port This function is enabled when the parallel mode is implemented at the RS232 serial port. 0 Bit3 Parallel implemented at CAN2 This function is enabled when parallel mode is implemented at CAN2. 0 Bit4 Parallel control in compatibility with NICE3000 This function is used when the NICE3000 is included in the group control system. The setting of this bit must be the same as that for all the other elevators in the group. 0 Bit6 Clear oor number and display direction in advance The displayed oor number is cleared before the elevator reaches the target oor. If the elevator needs to change the direction, the changed direction is displayed in advance. 0 Bit8 Single hall call button It is applied to applications where there is only one hall call button. 0 Bit10 Err30 judgment at re- leveling cancellation It indicates Err30 judgment when re-leveling is cancelled. 0 Bit14 Time interval detection of safety circuit 2 and door lock circuit 2 If the states of safety circuits 1 and 2 or the states of door lock circuits 1 and 2 are inconsistent, the system will prohibit running. After the states restore normal, the system is powered on again and starts running. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-10 Leveling sensor lter time 10–50 14 ms ★ It indicates the delay time from the moment when the leveling sensor acts to the moment when the leveling signal becomes active. You need not modify it. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-11 Elevator function selection 0–65535 8448 - ★ It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 162 - Table 7-7 Functions indicated by bits of F6-09 Bit Function Description Default Bit1 Disabling returning to base oor for verication The function of returning to base oor for verication due to large deviation of the car position is disabled. 0 Bit2 Cancelling auto sequential arrange of hall call oor addresses to be displayed If the display of a oor in group FE is set to 1, the following oors to be displayed are automatically arranged in the ascending order. 0 Bit5 Current detection valid at startup for synchronous motor The controller performs output current detection when the synchronous motor is started up. If the current is abnormal, the output will be locked and the running will be forbidden. 0 Bit6 Reversing MCB lamp output After this function is enabled, the MCB lamp output logic is reversed. 0 Bit7 Door open valid at non-door zone in the inspection state In the inspection state, you can open/close the door by pressing the door open/close button at the non-door zone. 0 Bit8 Door open and close once after inspection turned to normal The elevator door opens and closes once after the system turns from rst-time inspection to normal running. 1 Bit10 Buzzer not tweet upon re-leveling The buzzer inside the car does not tweet upon re- leveling. 0 Bit11 Super short oor function The controller cannot perform shaft-tuning if the oor height is less than 500 mm. After this function is enabled, shaft-tuning can be performed normally. 0 Bit12 Fault auto reset The controller automatically resets the faults once every hour. 0 Bit13 Err53 fault auto reset When Err53 is reported, if the conditions of door open limit valid and door lock release are satised, the controller resets Err53 automatically. A maximum of three times of auto reset is allowed. 1 Bit14 Up slow-down not reset for super short oor If this function is enabled, the up slow-down 1 signal does not reset oor display. The down slow-down 1 signal still resets oor display. This is valid only when the customized super short oor function is enabled. 0 Bit15 Down slow-down not reset for super short oor If this function is enabled, the down slow-down 1 signal does not reset oor display. The up slow-down 1 signal still resets oor display. This is valid only when the customized super short oor function is enabled. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-12 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★ It is used to set the VIP oor. For details, see section 5.2.4. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 163 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-13 Security oor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★ It is used to set the security oor of the elevator. If the security signal is active or it is during the night security period, the elevator runs to the security oor rst every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the target oor. The elevator can be made to stop at the security oor in the following two ways: • Fd-07/Fd-08 is set to 5 (Security signal). If the security signal is active, the elevator enters the security state. • The night security floor function is enabled (FE-32 Bit5 = 2), the elevator enters the security state from 22:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-14 Start time of down collective selective 1 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-15 End time of down collective selective 1 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-16 Start time of down collective selective 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-17 End time of down collective selective 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ These four parameters define the time periods of down collective selective 1 and down collective selective 2, during which, the elevator responds to only downward hall calls. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-18 Start time of time-based oor service 1 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-19 End time of time-based oor service 1 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-20 Service oor 1 of time- based oor service 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-21 Service oor 2 of time- based oor service 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-36 Service oor 3 of time- based oor service 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-22 Start time of time-based oor service 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-23 End time of time-based oor service 2 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-24 Service oor 1 of time- based oor service 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-25 Service oor 2 of time- based oor service 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ F6-37 Service oor 3 of time- based oor service 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 164 - These parameters define the time periods of two groups of time-based services and corresponding service oors. Service oor 1 corresponds to oors 1–16, service oor 2 corresponds to oors 17–32, and service oor 3 corresponds to oors 33–30. In the time period of time-based service 1 (set by F6-18 and F6-19), the elevator responds to the service oors set by F6-20, F6-21 and F6-36 but ignores the service oors set by F6-05, F6-06 and F5-35. The setting of time-based service oors is the same as that of service oors in F6-05. Note During the time-based oor service period, the settings of F6-05, F6-06 and F5-35 are invalid. If the two periods of time-based oor service 1 and time-based oor service 2 are overlapped, the system implements time-based oor service 1 because it has higher priority level. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-26 Peak 1 start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-27 Peak 1 end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-28 Peak 1 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ F6-29 Peak 2 start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-30 Peak 2 end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-31 Peak 2 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★ These parameters dene two peak time periods in parallel mode and corresponding oors. During a peak time period, if there are more than three car calls from the peak oor, the elevator enters the peak service state. At the moment, the car calls from the peak oor are valid all the time. The elevator returns to this oor if it is idle. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-38 Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ F6-39 Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆ These two parameters dene the elevator lock time period, during which automatic elevator lock has the same effect as elevator lock by means of the elevator lock switch. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-40 Program control selection 1 0–65535 0 - ★ F6-41 Program control selection 2 0–65535 0 - ★ F6-42 Program control selection 3 0–65535 0 - ★ These parameters are used to set program control functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 165 - Table 7-8 Functions indicated by the bits of F6-40 to F6-42 F6-40 Program Control Selection 1 Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Disability function It is used to enable or disable the disability function. 0 Bit1 Soft limit function When the up slow-down and down leveling signals are active and the up leveling signal is inactive, the system considers that the up limit is performed. It is the same for the down limit signal. 0 Bit2 JP16 input used as back door selection This function is enabled if the opposite door function is used. When JP16 has input, the elevator opens only the back door. When IP16 has no input, the elevator opens only the front door. 0 Bit3 JP16 input used as the back door open signal JP16 is used for the input of the back door open signal. 0 Bit4 Opening only one door of opposite doors under manual control This function is enabled only in the opposite door control mode 2 (hall call independent, opposite-door manual control). In this case, only one door opens each time while the other door must stay in the door close limit state. In group Fd, the HCB-B extended input includes "Single/Double door selection". If this input is active, both doors open if there is a car call. 0 Bit5 Timed elevator lock F6-38/F6-39 is valid only when this function is enabled. 0 Bit6 Manual door This function is used for the elevator with manual door. 0 Bit7 Elevator lock/Fire emergency under hall call at any oor When this function is enabled, the system enters the elevator lock or returning to re emergency oor state if the elevator lock input or re emergency input at any oor is active. 0 Bit8 Reserved - 0 Bit9 Disabling reverse oor number clear The system clears all the current car calls every time the elevator changes the direction by default. When this function is enabled, the function of clearing reverse oor numbers is disabled. 0 Bit10 Displaying next arriving oor number The next oor to be arrived at is displayed during elevator running. 0 Bit11 Responding to car calls rst The system responds to hall calls only after executing all car calls. 0 Bit12 Car call assisted command in single door used as disability function You can set the auxiliary command terminal (CN8) on the CTB for input of the disability calls (folding command not required). 0 Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 166 - F6-40 Program Control Selection 1 Bit Function Description Default Bit13 Folding command used as disability function and back door function It is valid only when the function of Bit14 is enabled. Bit13 = 1: Disability Bit13 = 0: Back door 0 Bit14 Car call command folding There are two folding methods when this function is enabled: A. CN7 is used for front door calls or ordinary calls, and CN8 is used for back door calls or disability calls. B. For CN7 and CN8, inputs 1 to 16 are used for front door calls or ordinary calls, and inputs 17 to 32 are used for back door calls or disability calls. 0 Bit15 JP20 used for switchover to back door JP20 is used for input of switchover between the front door and the back door. 0 F6-41 Program Control Selection 2 Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Reserved - 0 Bit1 Reserved - 0 Bit2 Inspection to stop due to slow-down 1 During inspection running, if the slow-down 1 acts, the system decelerates to stop. 0 Bit3 Reserved - 0 Bit4 Buzzer tweet during door open delay The buzzer will tweet when the door open delay time set in Fb-14 is reached. 0 Bit5 Reserved - 0 Bit6 Cancelling door open delay Door open delay is cancelled when the door open delay button is pressed again. 0 Bit7 Reserved - 0 Bit8 Elevator lock at door open In the elevator lock state, the elevator keeps the door open at the elevator lock oor. 0 Bit9 Display available at elevator lock In the elevator lock state, hall calls are is displayed normally. 0 Bit10 Elevator lock in the attendant state The elevator is locked properly in the attendant state. 0 Bit11 Blinking at arrival The car display blinks when the elevator arrives at a oor. The blinking advance time is set in F6-47. 0 Bit12 Door re-open during door open delay The door re-opens if the door open delay input is active during door close. 0 Bit13 Door re-open after car call of the present oor The door re-opens if the car call of the present oor is valid during door close. 0 NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 167 - F6-42 Program Control Selection 3 Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Reserved - 0 Bit1 Cancelling door open/close command at delay after door open/ close limit If this function is enabled, the door open/close command is cancelled at the delay of 1s after door open/close limit. 0 Bit2 Not judging door lock state at door close output On normal conditions, the system determines that the door is completely closed only when the door close limit signal is active and the door lock is applied. If this function is enabled, the system need not judge the door lock state. 0 Bit3 Door close command output during running The door close command is output continuously during the elevator running. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-43 Attendant function selection 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to select the attendant-related elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. Table 7-9 Attendant-related functions indicated by bits of F6-43 F6-43 Attendant Function Selection Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Calls cancelled after entering attendant state All car calls and hall calls are cancelled after the system enters the attendant state for the rst time. 0 Bit1 Not responding to hall calls The car blinks inside, prompting there is hall call, but the system does not respond. 0 Bit2 Attendant/Automatic state switchover If this function is enabled, the setting of F5-00 (Attendant/Normal switchover time) is valid. 0 Bit3 Door close at jogging The elevator door closes after the attendant presses the door close button manually. 0 Bit4 Automatic door close It is the same as the normal state. After the door open holding time is reached, the door closes automatically. 0 Bit5 Buzzer tweet at intervals in attendant state When the hall call oor and the car call oor are different, the buzzer tweets 2.5s at intervals. 0 Bit6 Continuous buzzer tweet in attendant state When the hall call oor and the car call oor are different, the buzzer tweets continuously. 0 Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 168 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-44 Fire emergency function selection 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to select the re emergency functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. Table 7-10 Fire emergency functions indicated by bits of F6-44 F6-44 Fire Emergency Function Selection Bit Function Description Default Bit0 to Bit2 Reserved - 0 Bit3 Arrival gong output in inspection or re emergency state The arrival gong is output in the inspection or re emergency state. 0 Bit4 Multiple car calls registered in re emergency state Multiple car calls can be registered in the re emergency state. Otherwise, only one car call can be registered. 0 Bit5 Retentive at power failure in re emergency state In the re emergency state, the current system and car state will be memorized at power failure and be resumed after the system is powered on again. 0 Bit6 Closing door by holding down the door close button In the re emergency state, the door close process can be completed only by holding down the door close button until the door close limit is reached. Otherwise, it will be switched over to door open automatically. 0 Bit7 Door close at low speed To implement door close at low speed in re emergency state, wiring to the CTB for output of door close at low speed needs to be added. 0 Bit8 Door close at car call registering The elevator enters the door close process automatically if a car call is registered. 0 Bit9 Displaying hall calls in re emergency state Hall calls are displayed in the re emergency state. 0 Bit10 Reserved - 0 Bit11 Exiting re emergency state for reghter The system can exit the re emergency state only after the elevator arrives at the re emergency oor. 0 Bit12 Reserved - 0 Bit13 Reserved - 0 Bit14 Opening door by holding down the door open button In the re emergency state, the door open process can be completed only by holding down the door open button until the door open limit is reached. Otherwise, it will be switched over to door close automatically. 0 Bit15 Automatic door open in re emergency oor The door opens automatically after the elevator arrives at the re emergency oor. 0 NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 169 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-45 Emergency evacuation function selection 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to select the emergency evacuation-related functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. Table 7-11 Emergency evacuation functions indicated by bits of F6-45 F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Direction determine mode 0 Automatically calculating direction 1 Load direction determining (based on load cell data or half-load signal) 1 Direction of nearest landing oor 0 Bit1 0 0 0 0 Bit2 Stopping at evacuation parking oor During evacuation running, the elevator arrives at the evacuation parking oor set in F6-49 (it must be a non-zero value and is a service oor). Otherwise, the elevator stops at the nearest oor. 0 Bit3 Door open at single leveling signal During evacuation running, when the elevator arrives at the target oor and a leveling signal is active, the elevator decelerates to stop. 0 Bit4 Compensation at startup The non-load-cell startup is still valid in the process of evacuation running. 0 Bit5 to Bit7 Reserved - 0 Bit8 Emergency running time protection If the elevator does not arrive at the required oor after 50s emergency evacuation running time, Err33 is reported. In this case, the function of switching over shorting stator braking mode to controller drive based on the time setting cannot be implemented. 0 Bit9 Reserved - 0 Bit10 Emergency buzzer output The buzzer tweets at intervals in the emergency evacuation running state. 0 Bit11 Reserved - 0 Bit12 Shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive It enables the function of switching over shorting stator braking mode to controller drive. 0 Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 170 - F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection Bit Function Description Default Bit13 Mode of shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive 0 Time setting If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds 50s, the controller starts to drive the elevator. 0 1 Speed setting If the speed is still smaller than the value of F6-48 after 10s in the shorting stator braking mode, the controller starts to drive the elevator. Bit14 Emergency evacuation exit mode 0 The system exits emergency evacuation when receiving the door open limit signal from the elevator that arrives at the target oor. 0 1 The system exits emergency evacuation when receiving the door close limit signal from the elevator that arrives at the target oor. Bit15 Function selection of shorting stator braking mode It enables the function. When this function is enabled, the setting of related function codes becomes effective. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-46 VIP function selection 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to select the elevator VIP function. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table. Table 7-12 VIP functions indicated by bits of F6-46 F6-46 VIP Function Selection Bit Function Description Default Bit0 VIP enabled by hall call (at VIP oor) After this function is enabled, the system enters VIP running. 0 Bit1 VIP enabled by terminal After the terminal for VIP hall call becomes ON, the system enters VIP running. 0 Bit2-Bit7 Reserved - 0 Bit8 Number of VIP car calls limited If this function is enabled, only one car call can be selected simultaneously in the VIP state. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-47 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 0 s ☆ It is used to set the blinking advance time when the elevator arrives the oor required by the car call. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 171 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-48 Emergency evacuation switching speed 0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s ★ It is used to set the switching speed at shorting stator braking mode switched over to controller drive via speed setting. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F6-49 Evacuation parking oor 0 to F6-01 0 s ★ It is used to set the evacuation parking oor when Bit2 (Stopping at evacuation parking oor) in F6-45 is enabled. Group F7: Test Function Parameters This group of parameters is specialized for elevator commissioning. Follow the instructions for normal-speed commissioning: 1. Before the commissioning, ensure that the shaft is unobstructed and the related parameters have been set properly. 2. Run the elevator to the middle oor of the shaft at the inspection speed so as to prevent wrong running direction. 3. Perform single-oor command commissioning and then perform multi-oor command commissioning. 4. After the commissioning is complete, check that the parameters in this group are set properly. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-00 Car call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆ F7-01 Up call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆ F7-02 Down call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆ These parameters are used to set the destination floors at elevator commissioning or repairing. They can be respectively used as the car call button, hall call up button and hall call down button. They remain valid after the commissioning command is input, and become invalid until they are set to 0 or the system suffers power failure. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0 - ☆ It is used to set the random running times of the system. The NICE3000 new has the random automatic running function. If the setting of F7-03 is greater than 60000, the system keeps implementing random automatic running until you set F7-03 to 0. You can set the time interval between two times of random running in F7-08. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 172 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-04 Hall call enabled 0: Yes 1: No 0 - ☆ It is used to enable the hall call function. • 0: Yes (hall call allowed) • 1: No (hall call forbidden) Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-05 Door open enabled 0: Yes 1: No 0 - ☆ It is used to enable the door open function. • 0: Yes (door open allowed) • 1: No (door open forbidden) Note Continuous running of the elevator without opening the door accelerates overheating of the controller module. Long-time use in such mode may cause overheat protection, and therefore, use the function with caution. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-06 Overload function 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0 - ☆ It is used to enable the overload function. Note This function is used only in the heavy-load test. Once the test is complete, prohibit over-load running immediately. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-07 Limit switch 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 0 - ☆ It is used to enable the limit switch function. Note The limit switch is disabled only in the test of the nal limit switch. Use the function with caution. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F7-08 Time interval of random running 0–1000 0 s ☆ It is used to set the time interval between two times of random running. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 173 - Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-00 Load for load cell auto-tuning 0–100 0 % ★ It is used to set the load for load cell auto-tuning. To perform load cell auto-tuning, do as follows: 1. Ensure that F8-01 is set to 0 and F5-36 is set to 2 or 3 to make the system allow load cell auto tuning. 2. Stop the elevator at any oor, with the car in the no-load state. Set F8-00 to 0 and press the ENTER key. 3. Put N% load in the car. Then set F8-00 to N and press the ENTER key. For example, if you put 500 kg load in the elevator with rated load of 1000 kg, set F8-00 to 50. After the load-cell auto-tuning is completed, the corresponding no-load and full-load data will be recorded in F8-06 and F8-07. You can also manually input the data according to the actual situation. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0–2 0 - ★ It is used to set the pre-torque compensation mode at startup of the elevator. The values are as follows: • 0: Pre-torque invalid Load cell auto-tuning is allowed. • 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation With a load cell, the system implements the pre-torque compensation function. • 2: Automatic pre-torque compensation The system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at startup without a load cell. If F8-01 is set to 1, the system outputs the torque matching the load in advance to ensure the riding comfort at startup. The output torque is limited by F2-08 (Torque upper limit). When the load torque is greater than the set torque upper limit, the output torque of the system is the torque upper limit. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★ It is used to set the pre-torque offset. It is actually the balance coefcient of the elevator, indicating the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the counterweight and the car weight are balanced. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 174 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★ F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★ These two parameters are used to set the pre-torque gain when the elevator runs on the drive side or the brake side. For details, see section 5.1.5. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-05 Current car load 0–1023 0 - ● This parameter is readable and reects the load situation in the car. The value is sampled by the NICE3000 new by using a load cell. This parameter is used to judge overload or full-load, or calculate the torque current for load cell pre-torque compensation. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-06 Car no-load load 0–1023 0 - ★ F8-07 Car full-load load 0–1023 100 - ★ These two parameters respectively specify the car no-load load and full-load load. They are AD sampling values. Note If F8-06 = F8-07, the full-load and over-load become invalid. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-08 Anti-nuisance function 0, 1, 2, 4 0 - ☆ It is the criteria for judging whether nuisance exists. The values are as follows: • 0: Anti-nuisance function disabled • 1: Nuisance judged by load cell A load cell is required. The system judges whether nuisance exists by comparing the load cell data and the number of car calls. • 2: Nuisance judged by light curtain The system determines that nuisance exists when the light curtain does not act after the elevator stops at arrival for three consecutive times. • 4: Nuisance judged by light-load signal If the light-load signal is active, the system determines that nuisance exists when the number of car calls is greater than a certain value. When the system determines that the elevator is in the nuisance state, it cancels all car calls. In this case, call calls need to be registered again. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 175 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-09 Emergency evacuation operation speed at power failure 0.000–0.100 0.050 m/s ★ It is used to set the speed for emergency evacuation operation at power failure. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-10 Emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure 0–2 0 - ★ It is used to set the emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure. • 0: Motor not running • 1: UPS • 2: 48 V battery power supply For details, see section 5.2.1. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ★ It is used to set the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied. For details, see Figure 7-3. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-12 Fire emergency oor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★ It is used to set the second re emergency oor. The switchover between re emergency oor 1 and re emergency oor 2 is implemented by means of input from the MCB. When this signal is input, the elevator enters the re emergency state and returns to this oor. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-16 Start address of hall call auxiliary command 0–40 0 - ☆ It is used to set the start address of hall calls from the back door. Address of a hall call from the back door = Address of a hall call from the front door at the same oor + F8-16 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F8-17 Hall call address check 0–1 0 - ☆ If it is valid, the HCB no longer displays the current oor information of the car but displays the set address of itself, convenient for inspection in the case of wrong oor address setting. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 176 - Group F9: Time Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F9-00 Idle time before returning to base oor 0–240 10 min ☆ It is used to set the idle time of the elevator before returning to the base oor. When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the setting of this parameter, the elevator returns to the base oor. If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F9-01 Time for fan and lamp to be turned off 0–240 2 min ☆ It is used to set the time that fan and lamp stays ON before being turned off automatically. If there is no running command in the automatic running state, the system turns off the fan and lamp automatically after the time set in this parameter. If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F9-02 Motor running time limit 0–45 45 s ★ It is used to set the running time limit of the motor. In normal running state, if the continuous motor running time in the same direction between two adjacent oors exceeds the setting of this parameter but no leveling signal is received, the system will perform protection. This parameter is mainly used for over-time protection in the case of steel rope slipping on the traction sheave. If this parameter is set to a value smaller than 3s, it becomes invalid. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100 Current year YYYY ☆ F9-04 Clock: month 1–12 Current month MM ☆ F9-05 Clock: day 1–31 Current day DD ☆ F9-06 Clock: hour 0–23 Current hour HH ☆ F9-07 Clock: minute 0–59 Current minute MM ☆ These parameters are used to set the current date and time of the system. Timekeeping is supported at power failure. You need to set the current system time correctly so that functions related to the time can be implemented. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 177 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property F9-09 Accumulative running time 0–65535 0 h ● F9-11 High byte of running times 0–9999 0 - ● F9-12 Low byte or running times 0–9999 0 - ● These parameters are used to view the actual accumulative running time and running times of the elevator. Running times of the elevator = F9-11 x 10000 + F9-12. Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-00 Keypad display selection 0–3 3 - ☆ The NICE3000 new system has three buttons and three 7-segment LEDs on the MCB. You can change the display content through the setting of this parameter. • 0: Reversed display of physical oor • 1: Positive display of physical oor • 2: Reversed display of hall call oor • 3: Positive display of hall call oor Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-01 Display in running state 1–65535 65535 - ☆ It is used to set the running parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the running state. A total of 16 running parameters can be displayed during running, each respectively corresponding to the 16 binary bits of FA-01. "1" indicates that the parameter is displayed, while "0" indicates that the parameter is not displayed. You can switch over the displayed parameter by pressing the shift button and set whether to display this parameter according to your own using habit. The 16 binary bits correspond to the running parameters listed in the following table. Table 7-13 Running parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-01 Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default Bit0 Running speed 1 Bit8 Output terminal 1 Bit1 Set speed 1 Bit9 Current oor 1 Bit2 Bus voltage 1 Bit10 Current position 1 Bit3 Output voltage 1 Bit11 Car load 1 Bit4 Output current 1 Bit12 CTB input state 1 Bit5 Output frequency 1 Bit13 CTB output state 1 Bit6 Input terminal low bits 1 Bit14 System state 1 Bit7 Input terminal high bits 1 Bit15 Pre-toque current 1 Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 178 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 - ☆ It is used to set the parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the stop state. A total of 16 parameters can be displayed at stop. The use is the same as that of FA-01. The 16 binary bits correspond to the stop parameters listed in the following table. Table 7-14 Stop parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-02 Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default Bit0 Running speed 1 Bit8 Slow-down distance at rated speed 1 Bit1 Bus voltage 1 Bit9 CTB input state 1 Bit2 Input terminal low bits 1 Bit10 CTB output state 1 Bit3 Input terminal high bits 1 Bit11 System state 1 Bit4 Output terminal 1 Bit12 Reserved 0 Bit5 Current oor 1 Bit13 Reserved 0 Bit6 Current position 1 Bit14 Reserved 0 Bit7 Car load 1 Bit15 Reserved 0 The running and stop parameters of the NICE3000 new system are the important references for engineers to perform commissioning on site. The parameters are described as follows: 1) Running speed: indicates the actual running speed of the elevator. Its maximum value is F0-03 (Maximum running speed), in unit of m/s. 2) Set speed: indicates the set speed of the NICE3000 new system during elevator running. It is the running speed calculated by the system theoretically at which the elevator should run. Its unit is m/s. 3) Bus voltage: indicates the DC bus voltage of the NICE3000 new system, in unit of m/s. 4) Output voltage: indicates the effective value of the equivalent voltage of the PWM wave output by the NICE3000 new system, in unit of V. 5) Output current: indicates the effective value of the actual current when the NICE3000 new system drives the motor to turn, in unit of A. 6) Output frequency: indicates the actual frequency of the motor during running. It has a xed corresponding relationship with the running speed. The unit is Hz. 7) Input terminal low bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active. A total of 16 bits are dened as below: NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 179 - Bit Meaning Bit Meaning BIT0 Reserved BIT8 Inspection signal BIT1 Up leveling signal BIT9 Inspection up signal BIT2 Down leveling signal BIT10 Inspection down signal BIT3 Door zone signal BIT11 Fire emergency signal BIT4 Safety circuit feedback 1 BIT12 Up limit signal BIT5 Door lock circuit feedback 1 BIT13 Down limit signal BIT6 RUN contactor feedback BIT14 Overload signal BIT7 Brake contactor feedback 1 BIT15 Full-load signal 8) Input terminal high bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active. A total of 16 bits are dened as below: Bit Meaning Bit Meaning BIT0 Up slow-down 1 signal BIT8 Door machine 1 light curtain BIT1 Down slow-down 1 signal BIT9 Door machine 2 light curtain BIT2 Up slow-down 2 signal BIT10 Brake output feedback 2 BIT3 Down slow-down 2 signal BIT11 UPS input BIT4 Up slow-down 3 signal BIT12 Elevator lock input BIT5 Down slow-down 3 signal BIT13 Safety circuit feedback 2 BIT6 Shorting door lock circuit contactor output feedback BIT14 Synchronous motor self-locked feedback BIT7 Motor overheat signal BIT15 Door lock circuit feedback 2 9) Output terminal: indicates the meaning of output terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active. A total of 16 bits are dened as below: Bit Meaning Bit Meaning BIT0 Reserved BIT8 Door machine 2 close BIT1 RUN contactor output BIT9 Contactor healthy BIT2 Brake contactor output BIT10 Fault state BIT3 Shorting door lock circuit contactor output BIT11 System in running state BIT4 Fire emergency oor arrival signal BIT12 Reserved BIT5 Door machine 1 open BIT13 Reserved BIT6 Door machine 1 close BIT14 Reserved BIT7 Door machine 2 open BIT15 Emergency leveling buzzer output Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 180 - 10) Current floor: indicates the information of the physical floor where the elevator is located. It is the same as the value of F4-01. 11) Current position: indicates the absolute distance from the current elevator car to the leveling ag of the rst oor, in unit of m. 12) Car load: indicates the percentage of the car load to the rated load judged by the NICE3000 new system based on data from the sensor, in unit of %. 13) CTB input state: indicates the meaning of CTB inputs by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active. A total of 16 bits are dened as below: Bit Meaning Bit Meaning BIT0 Light curtain 1 BIT8 Door open button BIT1 Light curtain 2 BIT9 Door close button BIT2 Door open limit 1 BIT10 Door open delay button BIT3 Door open limit 2 BIT11 Direct travel ride signal BIT4 Door close limit 1 BIT12 Attendant signal BIT5 Door close limit 2 BIT13 Direction change signal BIT6 Full-load signal BIT14 Independent running signal BIT7 Overload signal BIT15 Fireghter operation signal 14) CTB output state: indicates the meaning of CTB outputs by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active. A total of 16 bits are dened as below: Bit Meaning Bit Meaning BIT0 Door open output 1 BIT8 Door open button display BIT1 Door close output 1 BIT9 Door close button display BIT2 Door lock signal BIT10 Door open delay button display BIT3 Door open output 2 BIT11 Non-door zone stop BIT4 Door close output 2 BIT12 Reserved BIT5 Door lock signal BIT13 Buzzer output BIT6 Up arrival gong signal BIT14 Reserved BIT7 Down arrival gong signal BIT15 Energy saving signal 15) System state: indicates the system state by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active. A total of 16 bits are dened as below: NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 181 - Bit Meaning Bit Meaning BIT0 Light curtain state 1 BIT8 Car state: 1: Door open 2: Door open holding 3: Door close 4: Door close limit 5: Running BIT1 Light curtain state 2 BIT9 BIT2 Hall elevator lock (indicated on HCB) BIT10 BIT3 Hall re emergency (indicated on HCB) BIT11 BIT4 Elevator state: 0: Inspection 1: Shaft auto-tuning 3: Return to base oor at re emergency 4: Fireghter operation 6: Attendant operation 7: Automatic (normal) BIT12 Full-load BIT5 BIT13 Overload BIT6 BIT14 Reserved BIT7 BIT15 Reserved 16) Pre-torque current: indicates the percentage of the pre-torque current compensated by the NICE3000 new system at startup to the rated current, in unit of %. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 Degree (°) ● It displays the real-time encoder angle. This parameter cannot be modied. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-05 Control board software 0–65535 0 - ● FA-06 Drive board software 0–65535 0 - ● These two parameters respectively display the program version number of the logic control board and the drive control board. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ● It displays the current temperature of the heatsink. Normally, the heatsink temperature is below 40°C. When the heatsink temperature is too high, the system lowers the carrier frequency automatically to reduce heat dissipation. When the heatsink temperature rises to a certain value, the system reports the module overheat fault and stops running. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ● It displays the percentage of pre-torque current to the rated current (positive/negative display, indicating driving or braking). Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 182 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-12 Logic information 0–65535 0 - ● It displays the elevator status parameters. The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. LED 1 shows the state of door 1. LEDs 2 and 3 have no display. LEDs 4 and 5 together show the elevator state. Figure 7-7 Elevator state display 12345 The LEDs are dened in the following table. Table 7-15 LED display of the elevator state LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 Elevator State No Display No Display Door 1 State 00 Inspection state 8 Elevator lock - - 0 Waiting state 01 Shaft auto-tuning 09 Idle elevator parking 1 Door open state 02 Micro-leveling 10 Re-leveling at inspection speed 2 Door open limit 03 Returning to base oor at re emergency 11 Emergency evacuation operation 3 Door close state 04 Fireghter operation 12 Motor auto-tuning 4 Door close limit 05 Fault state 13 Keypad control - - 06 Attendant operation 14 Base oor check - - 07 Automatic running 15 VIP state - - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ● It displays the system running curve information. LEDs 5, 4 and 3 have no display, while LEDs 2 and 1 show the running curve information. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 183 - LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 No Display No Display No Display Curve Information - - - 00 Standby state 09 Deceleration start segment 01 Zero-speed start segment 10 Linear deceleration segment 02 Zero-speed holding segment 11 Deceleration end segment 03 Reserved 12 Zero speed at stop 04 Startup speed stage 13 Current stop phase 05 Acceleration start segment 14 Reserved 06 Linear acceleration segment 15 Stop data processing 07 Acceleration end segment 16-20 Auto-tuning stage 08 Stable-speed running segment 21 Emergency operation Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ● FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m ● FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A ● FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A ● FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ● FA-22 Output torque 0–100 0 % ● FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ● These parameters display the current performance state parameters of the system (the output torque and output power supports positive/negative display). Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-24 Communication interference 0–65535 0 - ● It displays the current communication quality of the system, as described in the following table. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 184 - Table 7-16 Communication quality display LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 SPI Communication Quality No Display CAN2 Communication Quality Modbus Communication Quality CAN1 Communication Quality 0 Good - 0 Good 0 Good 0 Good · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 0–9 indicates the communication quality. The greater the number is, the larger interference the communication suffers and the poorer the communication quality is. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ● FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ● FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ● FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ● FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ● FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ● FA-33 Car input state 0–65535 0 - ● FA-34 Car output state 0–65535 0 - ● FA-35 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ● FA-36 System state 1 0–65535 0 - ● FA-37 System state 2 0–65535 0 - ● The following gure shows an example of the displayed input states. Figure 7-8 Example of input state display 12345 A B C E F G DP Each segment indicates a function code. DP A B C E F G DD Function code State As shown in the preceding gure, the LEDs from right to left are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. For FA-26 to FA-37, LEDs 5 and 4 shows the function No.; LED 3 shows whether the function is valid (1) or invalid (0); the 16 segments of LEDs 1 and 2 show the states of the 16 functions in this parameter. According to the gure, LEDs 5, 4, and 3 show that function 10 (Inspection down) is 1 (Valid); LEDs 1 and 2 show that besides function 10, functions 4 (Safety circuit feedback), 5 (Door lock circuit feedback), 6 (RUN contactor feedback), 7 (Brake contactor feedback), and 8 (Inspection signal) are valid. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 185 - FA-26 Input state 1 FA-28 Input state 3 No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function 0 Reserved 8 Inspection signal 64 Reserved 72 Fire emergency oor switchover 1 Up leveling signal 9 Inspection up 65 Door 1 safety edge signal 73 Reserved 2 Down leveling signal 10 Inspection down 66 Door 2 safety edge signal 74 Reserved 3 Door zone signal 11 Fire emergency signal 67 Motor overheat signal 75 Reserved 4 Safety circuit feedback 12 Up limit signal 68 Earthquake signal 76 Reserved 5 Door lock circuit feedback 13 Down limit signal 69 Back door forbidden 77 Reserved 6 RUN contactor feedback 14 Overload signal 70 Light-load 78 Reserved 7 Brake contactor feedback 15 Full-load signal 71 Half-load 79 Reserved FA-27 Input state 2 FA-30 Input state 5 No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function 16 Up slow-down 1 signal 24 Door machine 1 light curtain 0 Reserved 8 Reserved 17 Down slow-down 1 signal 25 Door machine 2 light curtain 1 Reserved 9 Reserved 18 Up slow-down 2 signal 26 Brake contactor feedback 2 2 Reserved 10 Reserved 19 Down slow-down 2 signal 27 UPS input 3 Reserved 11 Reserved 20 Up slow-down 3 signal 28 Elevator lock input 4 High-voltage safety circuit signal 12 Reserved 21 Down slow-down 3 signal 29 Safety circuit 2 signal 5 High-voltage door lock circuit signal 13 Reserved 22 Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback 30 Shorting motor stator contactor feedback 6 Reserved 14 Reserved 23 Fireghter running signal 31 Door lock circuit 2 feedback 7 Reserved 15 Reserved Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 186 - FA-31 Output state 1 FA-32 Output state 2 No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function 0 Reserved 8 Door 2 close 16 High-voltage startup of brake 24 Reserved 1 RUN contactor output 9 Brake and RUN contactors healthy 17 Elevator running in up direction 25 Reserved 2 Brake contactor output 10 Fault state above level 3 18 Lamp/Fan output 26 Reserved 3 Shorting door lock circuit contactor output 11 Running state 19 Medical sterilization 27 Reserved 4 Fire emergency oor arrival 12 Shorting motor stator contactor output 20 Non-door zone stop 28 Reserved 5 Door 1 open 13 Power failure emergency output 21 Electric lock output 29 Reserved 6 Door 1 close 14 System healthy 22 Non-service state 30 Reserved 7 Door 2 open 15 Emergency leveling tweet 23 Reserved 31 Reserved FA-33 Car input state FA-34 Car output state No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function 0 Reserved 8 Overload input 0 Reserved 8 Down arrival gong 1 Door 1 light curtain 9 Light-load input 1 Door 1 open 9 Reserved 2 Door 2 light curtain 10 Reserved 2 Door 1 close 10 Reserved 3 Door 1 open limit 11 Reserved 3 Forced door close 1 11 Reserved 4 Door 2 open limit 12 Reserved 4 Door 2 open 12 Reserved 5 Door 1 close limit 13 Reserved 5 Door 2 close 13 Reserved 6 Door 2 close limit 14 Reserved 6 Forced door close 2 14 Reserved 7 Full-load input 15 Reserved 7 Up arrival gong 15 Reserved NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 187 - FA-35 Hall state No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function 0 Reserved 4 VIP signal 8 Reserved 12 Reserved 1 Elevator lock signal 5 Reserved 9 Reserved 13 Reserved 2 Fire emergency signal 6 Door close button input 10 Reserved 14 Reserved 3 Current oor forbidden 7 Reserved 11 Reserved 15 Reserved FA-36 System state 1 FA-37 System state 2 No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function 0 Door open 1 button 8 Door open 2 button 0 Up direction display 8 Reserved 1 Door close 1 button 9 Door close 2 button 1 Down direction display 9 Reserved 2 Door open delay 1 10 Door open 2 2 Running state 10 Reserved 3 Direct travel ride switch 11 Reserved 3 System full- load 11 Reserved 4 Attendant switch 12 Reserved 4 System overload 12 Reserved 5 Direction change switch 13 Reserved 5 System half- load 13 Reserved 6 Independent running switch 14 Reserved 6 System light- load 14 Reserved 7 Fire emergency 2 switch 15 Reserved 7 Reserved 15 Reserved Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FA-46 Hall call communication state 1 0–65535 0 - ● FA-47 Hall call communication state 2 0–65535 0 - ● FA-48 Hall call communication state 3 0–65535 0 - ● These parameters display the communication state between HCBs of all floors and the MCB. FA-46, FA-47, and FA-48 respectively indicate the communication state of oors 1 to 16, 17 to 32, and 33 to 40. As shown in Figure 7-4, LEDs 5 and 4 show the oor address; LED 3 show whether the communication for this floor address is normal ("1" is displayed) or interrupted ("0" is displayed). The communication quality can be viewed from LEDs 1 and 2: The 16 segments show the communication state of 16 oor addresses; ON indicates that the communication is normal, and OFF indicates that the communication is interrupted. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 188 - Group Fb: Door Function Parameter Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-00 Number of door machine (s) 1–2 1 - ★ It is used to set the number of door machine(s). Set this parameter based on actual conditions. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-01 CTB software 00–999 0 - ● It displays the software of the CTB connected to the controller. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-02 Service oors 1 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-03 Service oors 2 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-18 Service oors 3 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-04 Service oors 1 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-05 Service oors 2 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ Fb-19 Service oors 3 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆ These parameters are used to set the service oors of door machine 1 and door machine 2. Service floors 1 correspond to floors 1–16; service floors 2 correspond to floors 17–32; service oors 3 correspond to oors 33–48. The setting method is the same as that for F6- 05. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-06 Door open protection time 5–99 10 s ☆ It is used to set the door open protection time. After outputting the door open command, if the system does not receive the door open limit signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-opens the door. When the door open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err48. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-07 Arrival gong output delay 0–1000 0 ms ☆ When the value of this parameter is larger than 10 and the car display is switched over to the destination oor, the system outputs the arrival gong after the time set in this parameter. If the value is smaller than 10, the system outputs the arrival gong at stop. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 189 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-08 Door close protection time 5–99 15 s ☆ It is used to set the door close protection time. After outputting the door close command, if the system does not receive the door close limit signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-closes the door. When the door open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err49. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-09 Door re-open times 0–20 0 - ☆ It is used to set the door re-open/re-close times allowed when door open/close is abnormal. Note If this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that door re-open is not supported; in this case, the elevator keeps opening/closing the door if it does not receive the door open/close limit signal. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-10 Door state of standby elevator 0–2 0 - ☆ It is used to set the door state when the elevator is in stop and standby state. The values are as follows: • 0: Closing the door as normal at base oor • 1: Waiting with door open at base oor • 2: Waiting with door open at each oor Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-11 Door open holding time for hall call 1–1000 5 s ☆ It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a hall call. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-12 Door open holding time for car call 1–1000 3 s ☆ It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a car call. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-13 Door open holding time at base oor 1–1000 10 s ☆ It is used to set the door open holding time after the elevator arrives at the base oor. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 190 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-14 Door open delay 10–1000 30 s ☆ It is used to set the door open holding time when there is door open delay input. The elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-15 Special door open holding time 10–1000 30 s ☆ It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a disability call. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-16 Manual door open holding time 1–60 5 s ☆ It is used to set the door open limit delay in the case of manual door. This parameter is valid when the manual door function is used. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fb-17 Holding time for forced door close 5–180 120 s ☆ It is used to set the holding time before forced door close is implemented. If the forced door close function is enabled, the system enters the forced door close state and sends a forced door close signal when there is no door close signal after the time set in this parameter is reached. Group FC: Protection Function Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-00 Program control for protection function 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. FC-00 Program control for protection function Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Short-circuit to ground detection at power-on Whether the motor is short-circuited to ground is detected at power-on. If the motor is short-circuited to ground, the controller blocks the output immediately, and reports the fault. 0 Bit1 Reserved - 0 Bit2 Decelerating to stop at valid light curtain During normal-speed running, the elevator decelerates to stop immediately after the light curtain acts, and then runs to the registered destination oor after the light curtain restores. This function is mainly used in the case of manual door. 0 NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 191 - FC-00 Program control for protection function Bit Function Description Default Bit9 Mode without door open/close limit In this mode, the door open/close limit signal is not required, and the system automatically judges door open/close limit. The system determines that door open limit is implemented 3s after the door open command is output and door close limit is implemented 3s after the door close command is output. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function 0–65535 0 - ★ It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Overload protection It sets whether to implement overload protection. 1 Bit1 Canceling protection at output phase loss It sets whether to implement protection at output phase loss. 0 Bit4 Light curtain judgment at door close limit At door close limit, the door re-opens if the light curtain is valid. 0 Bit5 Canceling SPI communication judgment It sets whether to implement wire-breaking detection on SPI communication between the MCB and the drive board. 0 Bit6 Canceling MCB overspeed judgment It sets whether to implement MCB overspeed judgment . 0 Bit8 Reserved - 0 Bit14 Canceling protection at input phase loss It sets whether to implement protection at input phase loss. 0 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-02 Overload protection coefcient 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★ After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-02 x Rated motor current) and the duration lasts the time specied in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs fault Err11 indicating motor overload. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-03 Overload pre-warning coefcient 50–100 80 % ★ After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-03 x Rated motor current) and the duration lasts the time specied in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs a pre- warning signal. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 192 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-04 Opposite door selection 0–3 0 - ★ It is used to set opposite door-related control function. The values are as follows: • 0: Simultaneous control • 1: Hall call independent, car call simultaneous • 2: Hall call independent, car call manual control • 3: Hall call independent, car call independent For details on the use of the opposite door, see section 5.2.3. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-06 Designated fault 0–99 0 - ☆ It is used to designate the fault to be monitored. The designated fault code is saved in parameters of FC-07 to FC-19, and will not be overwritten. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-07 Designated fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-08 Designated fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-09 Designated fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-10 Designated fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-11 Logic information of designated fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-12 Curve information of designated fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-13 Set speed upon designated fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-14 Feedback speed upon designated fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-15 Bus voltage upon designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 V ● FC-16 Current position upon designated fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ● FC-17 Output current upon designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ● FC-18 Output frequency upon designated fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● FC-19 Torque current upon designated fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ● NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 193 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-20 1st fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-21 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-22 1st fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-23 1st fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-24 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-25 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-26 2nd fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-27 2nd fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● ··· FC-56 10th fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-57 10th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-58 10th fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-59 10th fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● These parameters record the latest 10 faults of the elevator. The fault code is a 4-digit number. The two high digits indicate the oor where the car is located when the fault occurs, and the two low digits indicate the fault code. For example, the 1st fault code is 0835, indicating that when the 1st fault (fault Err35) occurs, the car is near oor 8. The fault subcode is used to locate the causes of the fault. The specific fault time is recorded in month, day, hour and minute. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FC-60 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 - ● FC-61 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● FC-62 Latest fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● FC-63 Latest fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● FC-64 Logic information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-65 Curve information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ● FC-66 Set speed upon latest fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-67 Feedback speed upon latest fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● FC-68 Bus voltage upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 V ● FC-69 Current position upon latest fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ● FC-70 Output current upon latest fault 0–999.9 0 A ● FC-71 Output frequency upon latest fault 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● FC-72 Torque current upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ● Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 194 - Group Fd: Communication Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fd-00 Baud rate 0: 9600 1: 38400 0 bit/s ★ Fd-02 Local address 0–127 0: Broadcast address 1 - ★ Fd-03 Communication response delay 0–20 10 ms ★ Fd-04 Communication timeout 0.0–60.0 0: Invalid 0.0 s ★ These RS232 serial port communication parameters are used for communication with the monitor software in the host computer. • Fd-00 specifies the baud rate for serial communication. Fd-02 specifies the current address of the controller. The setting of these two parameters must be consistent with the setting of the serial port parameters on the host computer. • Fd-03 species the delay for the controller to send data by means of the serial port. • Fd-04 species the communication timeout time of the serial port. Transmission of each frame must be completed within the time set in Fd-04; otherwise, a communication fault occurs. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fd-05 Re-leveling stop delay 0.00–2.00 0.00 s ★ It is used to set the stop delay at re-leveling. After receiving the leveling signal during re- leveling, the elevator stops after the delay set in this parameter. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fd-07 HCB:JP1 input 0: Reserved NO/NC input: 1/33: Elevator lock signal 2/34: Fire emergency signal 3/35: Current oor forbidden 4/36: VIP oor signal 5/37: Security oor signal 6/38: Door close button input 1 - ★ Fd-08 HCB:JP2 input 2 - ★ These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The setting is effective to the HCBs for all oors. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 195 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fd-09 HCB:JP1 output 0: Invalid 1: Up arrival indicator 2: Down arrival indicator 3: Fault output 4: Non-door zone stop output 5: Non-service state output 6: Door close button indicator output 1 - ★ Fd-10 HCB:JP2 output 2 - ★ These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 1 and 4 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The setting is effective to the HCBs for all oors. Note The output load capacity of the HCB is limited, with the output voltage of 24 V and the load power not larger than 1 W. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fd-11 HCB-B:JP1 input 0: Reserved NO/NC input: 1/33: Light-load signal 2/34: Half-load signal 3/35: Door 2 selection 4/36: Door 2 restricted (back door forbidden) 5/37: Door 1 safety edge 6/38: Door 2 safety edge 7/39: Single/double door selection 0 - ★ Fd-12 HCB-B:JP2 input 0 - ★ Fd-13 HCB-B:JP3 input 0 - ★ Fd-14 HCB-B:JP4 input 0 - ★ Fd-15 HCB-B:JP5 input 0 - ★ Fd-16 HCB-B:JP6 input 0 - ★ These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 to JP6 on the HCB-B no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to all HCB-Bs connected to the system. Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 196 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fd-17 HCB-B:A1 output 0: Reserved 1: Fault output 2: Non-door zone stop output 3: Non-service state output 4: Fire emergency output 5: Power failure emergency output 6: Door lock valid 7: Night output signal 0 - ★ Fd-18 HCB-B:A2 output 0 - ★ Fd-19 HCB-B:B1 output 0 - ★ Fd-20 HCB-B:B2 output 0 - ★ Fd-21 HCB-B:C1 output 0 - ★ Fd-22 HCB-B:C2 output 0 - ★ Fd-23 HCB-B:C3 output 0 - ★ Fd-24 HCB-B:C4 output 0 - ★ Fd-25 HCB-B:C5 output 0 - ★ Fd-26 HCB-B:C6 output 0 - ★ These parameters are used to set the functions of four relay outputs and six open-collector outputs on the HCB-B no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to all HCB-Bs connected to the system. Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FE-00 Collective selective mode 0–2 0 - ★ It is used to set the collective selective mode of the system. The values are as follows: • 0: Full collective selective The elevator responds to both up and down hall calls. • 1: Down collective selective The elevator responds to down hall calls but does not respond to up hall calls. • 2: Up collective selective The elevator responds to hall up calls but does not respond to hall down calls. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 197 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FE-01 Floor 1 display 00: Display "0" 01: Display "1" 02: Display "2" 03: Display "3" 04: Display "4" 05: Display "5" 06: Display "6" 07: Display "7" 08: Display "8" 09: Display "9" 10: Display "A" 11: Display "B" 12: Display "G" 13: Display "H" 14: Display "L" 15: Display "M" 16: Display "P" 17: Display "R" 18: Display "-" 19: No display 20: Display "12" 21: Display "13" 22: Display "23" 23: Display "C" 24: Display "D" 25: Display "E" 26: Display "F" 27: Display "I" 28: Display "J" 29: Display "K" 30: Display "N" 31: Display "O" 32: Display "Q" 33: Display "S" 34: Display "T" 35: Display "U" 36: Display "V" 37: Display "W" 38: Display "X" 39: Display "Y" 40: Display "Z" 41: Display "15" 42: Display "17" 43: Display "19" 1901 - ☆ FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ☆ FE-03 Floor 3 display 1903 - ☆ FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 - ☆ FE-05 Floor 5 display 1905 - ☆ FE-06 Floor 6 display 1906 - ☆ FE-07 Floor 7 display 1907 - ☆ FE-08 Floor 8 display 1908 - ☆ FE-09 Floor 9 display 1909 - ☆ FE-10 Floor 10 display 0100 - ☆ Floor 11 to oor 30 display ··· FE-31 Floor 31 display 0301 - ☆ FE-35 Floor 32 display 0302 - ☆ FE-36 Floor 33 display 0303 - ☆ FE-37 Floor 34 display 0304 - ☆ FE-38 Floor 35 display 0305 - ☆ FE-39 Floor 36 display 0306 - ☆ FE-40 Floor 37 display 0307 - ☆ FE-41 Floor 38 display 0308 - ☆ FE-42 Floor 39 display 0309 - ☆ FE-43 Floor 40 display 0400 - ☆ These parameters are used to set the display of each oor. The setting range is 0000–9999, where the two high digits indicate the display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits indicate the display code of the unit's digit. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FE-52 Highest digit selection 1 0–4099 0 - ☆ FE-53 Highest digit selection 2 0 - ☆ FE-54 Highest digit selection 3 0 - ☆ FE-55 Highest digit selection 4 0 - ☆ FE-56 Highest digit selection 5 0 - ☆ These parameters are used to set special oor display. When the 2-digit display cannot meet the requirement, you can add the third-digit display by setting these parameters. In the values of these parameters, the two high digits indicate the oor address that requires special display, and the two low digits indicate the display content. For example, if oor 18 needs to be displayed as "17A", set FE-18 to 0710 (display "7A"), and then set the highest digit display, that is, FE-52 to 1801 (indicating that the highest digit display of oor address 18 is "1"). Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 198 - Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FE-32 Elevator function selection 1 0–65535 34816 - ☆ It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. FE-32 Elevator function selection 1 Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Reserved - 0 Bit1 Reserved - 0 Bit2 Re-leveling function The elevator performs re-leveling at a low speed with door open. An external shorting door lock circuit contactor needs to be used together. 0 Bit3 Door pre-open function During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller than a certain value and the door zone signal is active, the system shorts the door lock by means of the shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs the door open signal, implementing door pre-open. This improves the elevator use efciency. 0 Bit4 Stuck hall call cancellation The system automatically identies the state of the hall call buttons. If the state is abnormal, the system cancels the stuck hall call. 0 Bit5 Night security oor function From 10:00 p.m to 6:00 a.m., the elevator runs to the security oor rst every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the destination oor. 0 Bit6 Down collective selective peak service The peak service at down collective selective is used. 0 Bit7 Parallel peak service The peak service in parallel control is used. 0 Bit8 Time-based service oor function For details, see the description of related parameters in group F6. 0 Bit9 VIP function The VIP function is used. 0 Bit10 Reserved - 0 Bit11 Car call deletion A call can be deleted by pressing the button twice consecutively. 1 Bit12 Hall call deletion 0 Bit13 Reserved - 0 Bit14 Reserved - 0 Bit15 Door lock short- circuit detection After detecting the door lock short-circuit, the system reports fault Err53. 1 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FE-33 Elevator function selection 2 0–65535 36 - ☆ It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 199 - FE-33 Elevator Function Selection 2 Bit Function Description Default Bit0 Reserved - 0 Bit1 Door open holding at open limit The system still outputs the door open command upon door open limit. 0 Bit2 Door close command not output upon door close limit The system stops outputting the door close command upon door close limit. 1 Bit3 Reserved - 0 Bit4 Auto reset for RUN and brake contactor stuck If the feedback of the RUN and brake contactors is abnormal, faults Err36 and Err37 are reported, and you need to manually reset the system. With this function, the system resets automatically after the fault symptom disappears. A maximum of three auto reset times are supported. 0 Bit5 Slow-down switch stuck detection The system detects the state of slow-down switches. Once detecting that a slow-down switch is stuck, the system instructs the elevator to slow down immediately and reports a corresponding fault. 1 Bit6 Reserved - 0 Bit7 Forced door close If the door still does not close within the time set in Fb-17 in automatic state, the system outputs the forced door close signal; at this moment, the light curtain becomes invalid and the buzzer tweets. 0 Bit8 NO shorting motor stator contactor When Bit8 is set to 1, an NO shorting motor stator contactor is used. 0 Bit9 Immediate stop upon re-leveling The elevator decelerates to stop immediately after receiving a single leveling signal during re-leveling. By default, when receiving a leveling signal, the elevator stops after the re-leveling stop delay set in Fd-05. 0 Bit10 to Bit12 Reserved - 0 Bit13 High-speed elevator protection function A maximum allowable speed is set when the car is in the slow-down switch position. When the elevator exceeds the speed at the position, the system outputs a protection signal. 0 Bit14 Reserved - 0 Bit15 Opposite door independent control For details, see section 5.2.3. 0 Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 200 - Fr-00 Leveling adjustment function 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0 - ★ This parameter is used to enable the leveling adjustment function. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property Fr-01 Leveling adjustment record 1 00000–60060 30030 mm ★ Fr-02 Leveling adjustment record 2 30030 mm ★ … … Fr-20 Leveling adjustment record 20 30030 mm ★ These parameters are used to record the leveling adjustment values. Each parameter records the adjustment information of two oors, and therefore, the adjustment information of 40 oors can be recorded totally. The method of viewing the record is shown in the following gure. Figure 7-9 Viewing the leveling adjustment record Floor 1 Floor 2 Unit: mm As shown in the preceding gure, the left two LEDs and the right two LEDs respectively show the adjustment bases of oor 1 and oor 2. If the value is larger than 30, it is upward leveling adjustment; if the value is smaller than 30, it is downward leveling adjustment. The default value "30" indicates that there is no leveling adjustment. The maximum adjustment range is ± 30 mm. The leveling adjustment method is as follows: 17. Ensure that shaft auto-tuning is completed successfully, and the elevator runs properly at normal speed. 18. Set Fr-00 to 1 to enable the car leveling adjustment function. Then, the elevator shields hall calls, automatically runs to the top oor, and keeps the door open after arrival. If the elevator is at the top oor, it directly keeps the door open. 19. Go into the car, press the top oor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm upward; press the bottom floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm downward. The value is displayed in the car. Positive value: up arrow + value, negative value: down arrow + value, adjustment range: ± 30 mm 20. After completing adjustment for the current oor, press the top oor button and bottom oor button in the car at the same time to save the adjustment result. The car display restores to the normal state. If the leveling position of the current floor need not be adjusted, press the top oor button and bottom oor button in the car at the same time NICE3000 new User Manual Description of Function Codes - 201 - to exit the leveling adjustment state. Then, car calls can be registered. 21. Press the door close button, and press the button for the next oor. The elevator runs to the next oor and keeps the door open after arrival. Then, you can perform leveling adjustment. 22. After completing adjustment for all floors, set Fr-00 to 0 to disable the leveling adjustment function. Otherwise, the elevator cannot be used. Pay attention to the following precautions during the operation: 1. Each time shaft auto-tuning is performed, all leveling adjustment parameters can be cleared or reserved. a. If you set F1-11 to 3 on the operator or F7 to 1 on the keypad, all leveling adjustment parameters are reserved. b. If you set F1-11 to 4 on the operator or F-7 to 2 on the keypad, all leveling adjustment parameters are reserved. 2. When the re-leveling function is used, the leveling adjustment function is automatically shielded and cannot be used. Group FF: Factory Parameters Group FP: User Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 - ☆ It is used to set the user password. If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a password has been set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to enter the menu. If the entered password is incorrect, you cannot view or modify parameters. If FP-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password protection function is disabled. Remember the password that you set. If the password is set incorrectly or forgotten, contact Monarch to replace the control board. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FP-01 Parameter update 0–2 0 - ★ It is used to set processing on the parameters. The values are as follows: • 0: No operation • 1: Restore default settings • 2: Clear fault records If you set this parameter to 1 (Restore default settings), all parameters except group F1 are Description of Function Codes NICE3000 new User Manual - 202 - restored to the default settings. Be cautions with this setting. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property FP-02 User-dened parameter display 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0 - ★ It is used to set whether to display the parameters that are modied. When it is set to 1, the parameters that are different from the default setting are displayed. 8 EMC EMC NICE3000 new User Manual - 204 - Chapter 8 EMC 8.1 Denition of Terms 1. EMC Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the ability of electronic and electrical devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to generate electromagnetic interference that inuences other local devices or systems. In other words, EMC includes two aspects: The electromagnetic interference generated by a device or system must be restricted within a certain limit; the device or system must have sufcient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment. 2. First environment Environment that includes domestic premises, it also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes 3. Second environment Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes 4. Category C1 Controller Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the rst environment 5. Category C2 Controller PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional 6. Category C3 Controller PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the rst environment 7. Category C4 Controller PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1 000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment 8.2 Introduction to EMC Standard 8.2.1 Installation Environment The system manufacturer using the controller is responsible for compliance of the system with the European EMC directive. Based on the application of the system, the integrator must ensure that the system complies with standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2, C3 or C4. NICE3000 new User Manual EMC - 205 - The system (machinery or appliance) installed with the controller must also have the CE mark. The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC directive and standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2. WARNING If applied in the rst environment, the controller may generate radio interference. Besides the CE compliance described in this chapter, users must take measures to avoid such interference, if necessary. 8.2 2 Requirements on Satisfying the EMC Directive 1. The controller requires an external EMC lter. The recommended lter models are listed in Table 8-1. The cable connecting the lter and the controller should be as short as possible and be not longer than 30 cm. Furthermore, install the lter and the controller on the same metal plate, and ensure that the grounding terminal of the controller and the grounding point of the lter are in good contact with the metal plate. 2. Select the motor and the control cable according to the description of the cable in section 8.4. 3. Install the controller and arrange the cables according to the cabling and grounding in section 8.4. 4. Install an AC reactor to restrict the current harmonics. For the recommended models, see Table 8-2. 8.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices 8.3.1 Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side An EMC lter installed between the controller and the power supply can not only restrict the interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the controller, but also prevents the interference from the controller on the surrounding equipment. The NICE3000 new controller satises the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC lter installed on the power input side. The installation precautions are as follows: • Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC lter. The EMC lter is category I electric apparatus, and therefore, the metal housing ground of the filter should be in good contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area, and requires good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it will result in electric shock or poor EMC effect. • The grounds of the EMC lter and the PE conductor of the controller must be tied to the same common ground. Otherwise, the EMC effect will be affected seriously. • The EMC lter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the controller. The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of EMC lters for the NICE3000 new controller. Select a proper one based on actual requirements. EMC NICE3000 new User Manual - 206 - Table 8-1 Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC lter Controller Model Power Capacity Rated Input Current AC Input Filter Model AC Input Filter Model kVA A Changzhou Jianli (Schaffner) Three-phase 380 V NICE-L-C-4002 4.0 6.5 DL-10EBK5 FN 3258-7-44 NICE-L-C-4003 5.9 10.5 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33 NICE-L-C-4005 8.9 14.8 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33 NICE-L-C-4007 11.0 20.5 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-30-33 NICE-L-C-4011 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-30-33 NICE-L-C-4015 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33 NICE-L-C-4018 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33 NICE-L-C-4022 30.0 49.5 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-55-34 NICE-L-C-4030 40.0 62.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-75-34 NICE-L-C-4037 57.0 77.0 DL-80EBK5 FN 3258-100-35 NICE-L-C-4045 69.0 93.0 DL-100EBK5 FN 3258-100-35 NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 DL-130EBK5 FN3258-130-35 Three-phase 220 V NICE-L-C-2002 4.0 11.0 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-7-44 NICE-L-C-2003 5.9 17.0 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-7-44 220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-7-44 220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33 220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33 220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0 40.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33 220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0 49.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33 220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0 61.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-42-33 Single-phase 220 V NICE-L-C-2002 2.3 13.2 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06 NICE-L-C-2003 3.4 17.0 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06 220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8 29.0 DL-30TH1 FN2090-30-08 NICE3000 new User Manual EMC - 207 - Controller Model Power Capacity Rated Input Current AC Input Filter Model AC Input Filter Model kVA A Changzhou Jianli (Schaffner) 220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1 36.0 DL-40K3 Consult the manufacturer. 220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9 41.0 DL-50T3 220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3 40.0 DL-50T3 220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1 49.0 DL-50T3 220-NICE-L-C-4030 33.0 61.0 DL-70TH1 8.3.2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current. As an optional device, the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an application environment for harmonics. The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of input reactors. Table 8-2 Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors Controller Model Power Capacity Rated Input Current AC Input Reactor Model kVA (A) (Inovance) Three-phase 380 V NICE-L-C-4002 4.0 6.5 MD-ACL-7-4T-222-2% NICE-L-C-4003 5.9 10.5 MD-ACL-10-4T-372-2% NICE-L-C-4005 8.9 14.8 MD-ACL-15-4T-552-2% NICE-L-C-4007 11.0 20.5 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2% NICE-L-C-4011 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2% NICE-L-C-4015 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-40-4T-153-2% NICE-L-C-4018 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2% NICE-L-C-4022 30.0 49.5 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2% NICE-L-C-4030 40.0 62.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2% NICE-L-C-4037 57.0 77.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2% NICE-L-C-4045 69.0 93.0 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2% NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2% Three-phase 220 V NICE-L-C-2002 4.0 11.0 MD-ACL-15-4T-222-2% NICE-L-C-2003 5.9 17.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-222-2% EMC NICE3000 new User Manual - 208 - Controller Model Power Capacity Rated Input Current AC Input Reactor Model kVA (A) (Inovance) 220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2% 220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-113-2% 220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-153-2% 220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0 40.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2% 220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0 49.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2% 220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0 61.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2% Single-phase 220 V NICE-L-C-2002 2.3 13.2 Consult the manufacturer. NICE-L-C-2003 3.4 17.0 220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8 29.0 220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1 36.0 220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9 41.0 220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3 40.0 220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1 49.0 220-NICE-L-C-4030 33.0 61.0 8.4 Shielded Cable 8.4.1 Requirements for the Shielded Cable The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements. Shielded cables are classied into three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable. If conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient, add an independent PE cable, or use a four-conductor cable, of which one phase conductor is PE cable. The three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable are shown in the following gure. PE Shield PE conductor and shield PE Shield The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive current of the cable. NICE3000 new User Manual EMC - 209 - To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively, the shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid. The braided density of the cooper braid should be greater than 90% to enhance the shielding efciency and conductivity, as shown in the following gure. Cable core Internal insulator Copper braid Copper shield Insulation jacket It is recommended that all control cables be shielded. The grounding area of the shielded cable should be as large as possible. A suggested method is to x the shield on the metal plate using the metal cable clamp so as to achieve good contact, as shown in the following gure. Metal plate Metal cable clamp Shielded cable The following gure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable. Figure 8-1 Grounding of the shielded cable The shield must be grounded. 8.4.2 Installation Precautions of the Shielded Cable • Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended. The four-conductor shielded cable can also be used as an input cable. • The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive current of the cable. If the motor cable is over 100 meters long, an output lter or reactor is required. EMC NICE3000 new User Manual - 210 - • It is recommended that all control cables be shielded. • It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of the AC drive; the cable shield must be well grounded. For devices suffering from interference, shielded twisted pair (STP) cable is recommended as the lead wire and the cable shield must be well grounded. 8.4.3 Cabling Requirement 1. The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables, with recommended distance larger than 0.5 m. The motor cables of several controllers can be laid side by side. 2. It is recommended that the motor cables, power input cables and control cables be laid in different ducts. To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the output voltage of the controller, the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side by side for a long distance. 3. If the control cable must run across the power cable, make sure they are arranged at an angle of close to 90°. Other cables must not run across the controller. 4. The power input and output cables of the controller and weak-current signal cables (such as control cable) should be laid vertically (if possible) rather than in parallel. 5. The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded. Aluminium ducts can be used to improve electric potential. 6. The filter, controller and motor should be connected to the system (machinery or appliance) properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact. 7. The controller must be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact. 8. The filter must be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact. 9. The motor should be connected to the system (machinery or appliance) properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact. Figure 8-2 Cabling diagram NICE3000 new integrated elevator controller Min. 200 mm Min. 300 mm Power cable Motor cable Min. 500 mm Min. 500 mm Braking resistor cable Motor cable Power cable 90° 90° 90° Control cable Control cable Power cable Control cable Control cable NICE3000 new User Manual EMC - 211 - 8.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems The controller generates very strong interference. Although EMC measures are taken, the interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use. When the controller interferes with other devices, adopt the following solutions. Interference Type Solution Leakage protection switch tripping • Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller. • Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains power supply. • Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable. • Add magnetic rings to the input drive cable. Controller interference during running • Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller. • Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage. • Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable with magnetic rings. • Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the signal cable with magnetic rings. • Connect the equipment to the common ground. Communication interference • Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller. • Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage. • Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable with magnetic rings. • Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source and the load side. • Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable. • Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the cable shield to the common grounding point. I/O interference • Enlarge the capacitance at the low-speed DI. A maximum of 0.11 uF capacitance is suggested. • Enlarge the capacitance at the AI. A maximum of 0.22 uF is suggested. EMC NICE3000 new User Manual - 212 - 9 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual - 214 - Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9.1 Description of Fault Levels The NICE3000 new has almost 60 pieces of alarm information and protective functions. It monitors various input signals, running conditions and feedback signals. If a fault occurs, the system implements the relevant protective function and displays the fault code. The controller is a complicated electronic control system and the displayed fault information is graded into ve levels according to the severity. The faults of different levels are handled according to the following table. Table 9-1 Fault levels Category Action Remarks Level 1 1. Display the fault code. 2. Output the fault relay action command. 1A. The elevator running is not affected on any condition. Level 2 1. Display fault code. 2. Output the fault relay action command. 3. Continue normal running of the elevator. 2A. The parallel function is disabled. 2B. The door pre-open/re-leveling function is disabled. Level 3 1. Display the fault code. 2. Output the fault relay action command. 3. Stop output and apply the brake immediately after stop. 3A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops at special deceleration rate, and cannot restart. 3B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s. Level 4 1. Display the fault code. 2. Output the fault relay action command. 3. In distance control, the elevator decelerates to stop and cannot run again. 4A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops under special deceleration rate, and cannot restart. 4B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s. 4C. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s. Level 5 1. Display the fault code. 2. Output the fault relay action command. 3. The elevator stops immediately. 5A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops immediately and cannot restart. 5B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops, and then can start running at low speed after a delay of 3s. NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting - 215 - Note • A, B, and C are fault sub-category. • Low-speed running involves inspection, emergency evacuation, shaft auto-tuning, re-leveling, motor auto-tuning, base oor detection, and running in operation panel control. • Normal-speed running involves automatic running, returning to base oor in re emergency state, reghter operation, attendant operation, elevator lock, and elevator parking. 9.2 Fault Information and Troubleshooting If an alarm is reported, the system performs corresponding processing based on the fault level. You can handle the fault according to the possible causes described in the following table. Table 9-2 Fault codes and troubleshooting Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err02 Over-current during acceleration 1. The main circuit output is grounded or short circuited. 2. Motor auto-tuning is performed improperly. 3. The load is too heavy. 4. The encoder signal is incorrect. 1. Check whether the RUN contactor at the controller output side is normal. 2. Check. • Whether the power cable jacket is damaged • Whether the power cable is possibly short circuited to ground • Whether the cable is connected reliably 3. Check the insulation of motor power terminals, and check WHETHER the motor winding is short-circuited or grounded. 4. Check whether the shorting PMSM stator contactor causes controller output short circuit. 5. Check whether motor parameters comply with the nameplate. 6. Perform motor auto-tuning again. 7. Check whether the brake keeps released before the fault occurs and whether the brake is stuck mechanically. (To be continued) 5A Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual - 216 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err03 Over-current during deceleration 1. The main circuit output is grounded or short circuited. 2. Motor auto-tuning is performed improperly. 3. The load is too heavy. 4. The deceleration rate is too short. 5. The encoder signal is incorrect. 8. Check whether the balance coefcient is correct. 9. Check whether the encoder wirings are correct. For asynchronous motor, perform SFVC and compare the current to judge whether the encoder works properly. 10. Check: • Whether encoder pulses per revolution (PPR) is set correctly • Whether the encoder signal is interfered with • Whether the encoder cable runs through the duct independently • Whether the cable is too long • Whether the shield is grounded at one end • 11. Check whether: • Whether the encoder is installed reliably • Whether the rotating shaft is connected to the motor shaft reliably • Whether the encoder is stable during normal-speed running 12. Check whether UPS feedback is valid in the non-UPS running state (Err02). 13. Check whether the acceleration/ deceleration rate is too high (Err02, Err03). (End) 5A Err04 Over-current at constant speed 1. The main circuit output is grounded or short circuited. 2. Motor auto-tuning is performed properly. 3. The load is too heavy. 4. The encoder is seriously interfered with. 5A NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting - 217 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err05 Over-voltage during acceleration 1. The input voltage is too high. 2. The regeneration power of the motor is too high. 3. The braking resistance is too large, or the braking unit fails. 4. The acceleration rate is too short. 1. Adjust the input voltage. Observe whether the bus voltage is normal and whether it rises too quickly during running. 2. Check for the balance coefcient. 3. Select a proper braking resistor and check whether the resistance is too large based on the recommended braking resistance table in chapter 3. 4. Check: • Whether the cable connecting the braking resistor is damaged • Whether the cooper wire touches the ground • Whether the connection is reliable 5A Err06 Over-voltage during deceleration 1. The input voltage is too high. 2. The braking resistance is too large, or the braking unit fails. 3. The deceleration rate is too short. 5A Err07 Over-voltage at constant speed 1. The input voltage is too high. 2. The braking resistance is too large, or the braking unit fails. 5A Err08 Pre-charge relay not close at power-on 1. The external power supply is instable. 2. The hardware is faulty. 1. Check whether the external power supply is stable and whether the wiring of all power input cables is secure. 2. Forbid frequently powering on the controller on the condition that the controller is not powered off completely. 3. For the hardware fault, contact the agent or Monarch. 5A Err09 Under-voltage 1. Instantaneous power failure occurs on the input power supply. 2. The input voltage is too low. 3. The drive control board fails. 1. Eliminate external power supply faults and check whether the power fails during running. 2. Check whether the wiring of all power input cables is secure. 3. Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual - 218 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err10 Controller overload 1. The brake circuit is abnormal. 2. The load is too heavy. 3. The encoder feedback signal is abnormal. 4. The motor parameters are incorrect. 5. A fault occurs on the motor power cables. 1. Check the brake circuit and power input. 2. Reduce the load. 3. Check whether the encoder feedback signal and setting are correct, and whether the initial angle of the encoder for the PMSM is correct. 4. Check the motor parameter setting and perform motor auto- tuning. 5. Check the power cables of the motor (refer to the solution of Err02). 4A Err11 Motor overload 1. FC-02 is set improperly. 2. The brake circuit is abnormal. 3. The load is too heavy. 1. Adjust the parameter (FC-02 can be set to the default value). 2. Refer to the solution of Err10. 3A Err12 Power supply phase loss 1. The power input phases are not symmetric. 2. The drive control board fails. 1. Check whether the three phases of power supply are balanced and whether the power voltage is normal. If not, adjust the power input. 2. Contact the agent or Monarch. 4A Err13 Power output phase loss 1. The output wiring of the main circuit is loose. 2. The motor is damaged. 1. Check the wiring. 2. Check whether the contactor on the output side is normal. 3. Eliminate the motor fault. 4A Err14 Module overheat 1. The ambient temperature is too high. 2. The fan is damaged. 3. The air lter is blocked. 1. Lower the ambient temperature. 2. Clear the air lter. 3. Replace the damaged fan. 4. Check whether the installation clearance of the controller satises the requirement. 5A Err16 Current control fault 1. The excitation current deviation is too large. 2. The torque current deviation is too large. 3. The torque limit is exceeded for a very long time. 1. Check the circuit of the encoder. 2. The output MCCB becomes OFF. 3. The values of the current loop parameters are too small. 4. Perform motor auto-tuning again if the zero-point position is incorrect. 5. Reduce the load if it too heavy. 5A NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting - 219 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err17 Reference signal of the encoder incorrect 1. The deviation between the Z signal position and the absolute position is too large. 2. The deviation between the absolute position angle and the accumulative angle is too large. 1. Check whether the encoder runs properly. 2. Check whether the encoder wiring is correct and reliable. 3. Check whether the PG card wiring is correct. 4. Check whether the grounding of the control cabinet and the motor is normal. 5A Err18 Current detection fault The drive control board fails. Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A Err19 Motor auto- tuning fault 1. The motor cannot rotate properly. 2. The motor auto- tuning times out. 3. The encoder for the PMSM fails. 1. Enter the motor parameters correctly. 2. Check the motor wiring and whether phase loss occurs on the contactor at the output side. 3. Check the encoder wiring and ensure that the encoder PPR is set properly. 4. Check whether the brake keeps released during no-load auto- tuning. 5. Check whether the inspection button is released before the PMSM with-load auto-tuning is nished. 5A Err20 Speed feedback incorrect 1. The encoder model does not match the motor. 2. The encoder wiring is incorrect. 3. The current keeps large during low-speed running. 1. Check whether F1-00 is set correctly. 2. Check the encoder wiring. 3. If Err20 is reported in the stop state, check whether signal lines C, D of the SIN/COS encoder or signal lines U, V, W of the UVW encoder are broken. 4. Check whether the encoder is stuck mechanically during running. 5. Check whether the brake keeps released during running. 5A Err22 Leveling signal abnormal The leveling position deviation is too large. 1. Check whether the leveling and door zone sensors work properly. 2. Check the installation verticality and depth of the leveling plates. 3. Check the leveling signal input points of the MCB. 4. Check whether the steel rope slips. 1A Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual - 220 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err24 RTC clock fault The RTC clock information of the MCB is abnormal. 1. Replace the clock battery. 2. Replace the MCB. 3B Err25 Storage data abnormal The storage data of the MCB is abnormal. Contact the agent or Monarch. 4A Err26 Earthquake signal The earthquake signal is active and the duration exceeds 2s. Check whether the earthquake signal is consistent with the parameter setting (NC, NO) of the MCB. 3B Err29 Shorting PMSM stator feedback abnormal The shorting PMSM stator feedback is abnormal. 1. Check whether the state (NO, NC) of the feedback contact on the contactor is consistent with the parameter setting of the MCB. 2. Check whether the state of the MCB output indicator is consistent with the contactor action. 3. Check whether corresponding feedback contact acts after the contactor acts, and whether the corresponding feedback input point of the MCB acts correctly. 4. Check whether the shorting PMSM stator contactor is consistent with the MCB output feature. 5. Check the coil circuit of the shorting PMSM stator contactor. 3B Err30 Elevator position abnormal 1. The automatic running time of the elevator is too long. 2. The re-leveling running time of the elevator is too long. 3. The up/down limit switch acts during the re-leveling process. 4. The steel rope slips or locked-rotor occurs on the motor. 1. Check whether the up/down limit switch acts during re-leveling. 2. Check whether the leveling signal cables are connected reliably and whether the signal copper wires may touch the ground or be short circuited with other signal cables. 3. Check whether the distance between two oors is too large, causing too long re-leveling running time. 4. Check whether F9-02 is set properly (greater than the whole normal-speed running time). 5. Check whether signal loss exists in the encoder circuits. 4A NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting - 221 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err33 Elevator speed abnormal 1. The detected running speed exceeds the upper protection limit. 2. The speed exceeds the limit during self- sliding. 3. The speed exceeds the limit or re-leveling is not performed within the required time during emergency running. 1. Check whether the encoder is used properly. 2. Check the setting of motor nameplate parameters. Perform motor auto-tuning again. 3. Check whether the inspection signal acts at normal speed running. 4. Check the inspection switch and signal cables. 5. Check whether the emergency power capacity meets the requirements. 6. Check whether the emergency running speed is set properly. 5A Err34 Logic fault Logic of the MCB is abnormal Contact the agent or Monarch. 4C Err35 Shaft auto- tuning data abnormal 1. The elevator is not at the bottom oor when shaft auto-tuning is started. 2. No leveling signal is received within 45s continuous running. 3. The distance between two oors is too small. 4. The maximum number of landing oors is inconsistent with the setting value. 5. The oor pulses change inversely. 6. The system is not in the inspection state when shaft auto-tuning is performed. 7. Shaft auto-tuning is not performed upon power-on. 1. If Err35 is reported when the RUN contactor is not closed, check: • Whether the next slow-down switch is valid • Whether F4-01 (Current oor) is set to 1 • Whether the inspection switch is in inspection state and supports inspection running • Whether F0-00 is set to 1 2. If Err35 is reported at the rst leveling position, check: • Whether the value of F4-03 increases in UP direction and decreases in DOWN direction. If not, exchange the MCBs PGA and PGB. • Whether the NO/NC setting of the leveling sensor is set correctly • Whether the leveling plates are inserted properly if the leveling sensor signal blinks (To be continued) 4C Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual - 222 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err35 Shaft auto- tuning data abnormal 1. The elevator is not at the bottom oor when shaft auto-tuning is started. 2. No leveling signal is received within 45s continuous running. 3. The distance between two oors is too small. 4. The maximum number of landing oors is inconsistent with the setting value. 5. The oor pulses change inversely. 6. The system is not in the inspection state when shaft auto-tuning is performed. 7. Shaft auto-tuning is not performed upon power-on. 3. If Err35 is reported during running, check: • Whether the running times out: No leveling signal is received when the running time exceeds F9-02 • Whether the super short oor function is enabled when the oor distance is less than 50 cm • Whether the setting of F6-00 (Top oor of the elevator) is smaller than the actual condition 4: If Err35 is reported when the elevator arrives at the top oor, check: • Whether the obtained top oor of the elevator and bottom oor of the elevator are consistent with the setting of F6-00 and F6-01 when the up slow-down signal is valid and the elevator reaches the door zone • Whether the obtained oor distance is less than 50 cm 5. If Err35 is reported at power-on, check whether the detected ag length is 0. (End) 4C Err36 RUN contactor feedback abnormal 1. The feedback of the RUN contactor is effective at startup of the elevator, but the contactor has no output. 2. The controller outputs the RUN signal but receives no RUN feedback during the startup. 3. When both feedback signals of the RUN contactor are enabled, their states are inconsistent. 1. Check whether the feedback contact of the contactor acts properly. 2. Check the signal feature (NO, NC) of the feedback contact. 3. Check whether the output cables UVW of the controller are connected properly. 4. Check whether the control circuit of the RUN contactor coil is normal. 5A NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting - 223 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err37 Brake contactor feedback abnormal 1. The output of the brake contactor is inconsistent with the feedback. 2. When both feedback signals of the brake contactor are enabled, their states are inconsistent. 1. Check whether the brake coil and feedback contact are correct. 2. Check the signal feature (NO, NC) of the feedback contact. 3. Check whether the control circuit of the brake contactor coil is normal. 5A Err38 Encoder signal abnormal 1. There is no input of the encoder pulses when the elevator runs automatically. 2. The direction of the input encoder signal is incorrect when the elevator runs automatically. 3. F0-00 is set to 0 (SFVC) in distance control. 1. Check whether the encoder is used correctly. 2. Exchange phases A and B of the encoder. 3. Check the setting of F0-00, and change it to CLVC. 4. Check whether the system and signal cables are grounded reliably. 5. Check whether cabling between the encoder and the PG card is correct. 5A Err39 Motor overheat The motor overheat relay input remains valid for a certain time. 1. Check whether the thermal protection relay is normal. 2. Check whether the motor is used properly and whether it is damaged. 3. Improve cooling conditions of the motor. 3A Err40 Elevator running timeout The set elevator running time is reached. The elevator is used for a long time and needs maintenance. 4B Err41 Safety circuit breaking off The safety circuit signal is cut off. 1. Check the safety circuit switches and their states. 2. Check whether the external power supply is normal. 3. Check whether the safety circuit contactor acts properly. 4. Conrm the signal feature (NO, NC) of the feedback contact of the safety circuit contactor. 5A Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual - 224 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err42 Door lock breaking off during running The door lock circuit feedback is invalid during the elevator running. 1. Check whether the hall door lock and the car door lock are in good contact. 2. Check whether the door lock contactor acts properly. 3. Check the signal feature (NO, NC) of the feedback contact on the door lock contactor. 4. Check whether the external power supply is normal. 5A Err43 Up limit signal abnormal The up limit switch acts when the elevator is running upward. 1. Check the signal feature (NO, NC) of the up limit switch. 2. Check whether the up limit switch is in good contact. 3. Check whether the limit switch is installed at a relatively low position and acts even when the elevator arrives at the terminal oor normally. 4C Err44 Down limit signal abnormal The down limit switch acts when the elevator is running downward. 1. Check the signal feature (NO, NC) of the down limit switch. 2. Check whether the down limit switch is in good contact. 3. Check whether the limit switch is installed at a relatively high position and thus acts even when the elevator arrives at the terminal oor normally. 4C Err45 Slow-down switch position abnormal 1. The slow-down signal is abnormal. 2. The obtained slow- down distance is incorrect during shaft auto-tuning. 1. Check whether the up slow-down 1 and the down slow-down 1 are in good contact. 2. Check the signal feature (NO, NC) of the up slow-down 1 and the down slow-down 1. 3. Ensure that the obtained slow- down distance satises the slow- down requirement at the elevator speed. 4B NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting - 225 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err46 Re-leveling abnormal 1. The re-leveling running speed exceeds 0.1 m/s. 2. The elevator is out of the door zone when re- leveling. 3. The feedback of the shorting door lock circuit contactor is abnormal during running. 1. Check the original and secondary wiring of the shorting door lock circuit relay. 2. Check whether the shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback function is enabled and whether the feedback signal is normal. 3. Check whether the encoder is used properly. 2B Err47 Shorting door lock circuit contactor abnormal 1. The feedback of the shorting door lock circuit contactor is abnormal when the door pre-open and re- leveling function is enabled. 2. The output of the shorting door lock circuit contactor times out. 3. The elevator speed exceeds the limit during running in the condition that the shorting door lock circuit function is enabled. 1. Check the signal feature (NO, NC) of the feedback contact on the shorting door lock circuit contactor. 2. Check whether the shorting door lock circuit contactor acts properly. 3. Check whether the elevator running speed at door pre-open or re-leveling is set properly. 2B Err48 Door open fault The consecutive times that the door does not open to the limit reaches the setting in Fb-13. 1. Check whether the door machine system works properly. 2. Check whether the CTB is normal. 3. Check whether the door open limit signal is normal. 5A Err49 Door close fault The consecutive times that the door does not open to the limit reaches the setting in Fb-13. 1. Check whether the door machine system works properly. 2. Check whether the CTB is normal. 3. Check whether the door lock acts properly. 5A Troubleshooting NICE3000 new User Manual - 226 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err51 CAN communication abnormal Feedback data of CANbus communication with the CTB remains incorrect. 1. Check the communication cable connection. 2. Check the power supply of the CTB. 3. Check whether the 24 V power supply of the controller is normal. 4. Check whether strong-power interference on communication exists. 1A Err52 HCB communication abnormal Feedback data of Modbus communication with the HCB remains incorrect. 1. Check the communication cable connection. 2. Check whether the 24 V power supply of the controller is normal. 3. Check whether the HCB addresses are repeated. 4. Check whether strong-power interference on communication exists. 1A Err53 Door lock fault In the automatic running state, the relevant door lock signal is abnormal. 1. Check whether the door lock circuit is normal. 2. Check whether the feedback contact of the door lock contactor acts properly. 3. Check whether the system receives the door open limit signal when the door lock signal is valid. 4. Check whether when the hall door lock signal and the car door lock signal are detected separately, the detected states of the hall door locks and car door lock are inconsistent. 5A Err55 Stop at another landing oor During automatic running of the elevator, the door open limit is not achieved at the present oor. Check the door open limit signal at the present oor. 1A Err57 Serial peripheral interface (SPI) communication abnormal The SPI communication is abnormal. 1. Check the wiring between the control board and the drive board. 2. Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A NICE3000 new User Manual Troubleshooting - 227 - Fault Code Name Possible Causes Solution Level Err58 Shaft position switches abnormal 1. The up limit and down limit switches are valid simultaneously. 2. The up slow-down and down slow-down switches are valid simultaneously. 1. Check whether the states (NO, NC) of the slow-down switches and limit switches are consistent with the parameter setting of the MCB 2. Check whether malfunction of the slow-down switches and limit switches exists. 4B Note • Fault Err41 is not recorded in the elevator stop state. • Fault Err42 is reset automatically when the door lock circuit is shorted or 1s after the fault occurs in the door zone. • If faults Err51 and Err52 persist, they are recorded once every one hour. Warranty Agreement 1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months (refer to the barcode on the equipment). During the warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by following the instructions, Monarch will be responsible for free maintenance. 2. Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the following reasons: a. Improper use or repair/modication without prior permission b. Fire, ood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster c. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement d. Improper operation e. Damage out of the equipment (for example, external device) 3. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product Warranty Card in detail. 4. The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of Monarch. 5. The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance. 6. If there is any problem during the service, contact Monarch's agent or Monarch directly. 7. This agreement shall be interpreted by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd. Service Department, Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd. Address: 16, Youciang Rd, Wangshan Industrial Park, Wuzhong Economic Development Zone, Suzhou, China P.C.: 215104 Website: http://www.szmctc.cn Product Warranty Card Customer information Add. of unit: Name of unit: P.C.: Contact person: Tel.: Product information Product model: Body barcode (Attach here): Name of agent: Failure information (Maintenance time and content): Maintenance personnel: 

0 Пользователей и 1 Гость просматривают эту тему.

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Автор	Сообщение
	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Пт, 27 фев 2015, 09:46
Активный пользователь Зарегистрирован: Вс, 04 авг 2013, 13:53 Сообщения: 230 Откуда: Казахстан.Алмата Реальное имя: Тимур	Завтра только на лифт попаду…буду разбираться… _________________ — Нет ничего более стимулирующего, чем когда всё идёт не так как надо.
Вернуться к началу

maxman11	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Ср, 04 мар 2015, 15:07
Зарегистрирован: Сб, 06 мар 2010, 15:01 Сообщения: 41 Откуда: Абакан SKYPE: maxman115 Реальное имя: Алексей
Вернуться к началу

пэлк	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Вт, 05 май 2015, 19:52
Новичок Зарегистрирован: Вс, 15 мар 2015, 13:07 Сообщения: 16	Уважаемые колеги помогите ошибка er 41 безопасность собрал пускатель сработал но ошибка все равно осталось что делать ?? За ранее благодарен
Вернуться к началу

Джентльмен	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Ср, 06 май 2015, 14:24
Зарегистрирован: Вт, 21 фев 2012, 01:04 Сообщения: 505 Откуда: Россия Реальное имя: Dmitrii	Цепи собрал, пускатель сработал, а соответствующая индикация на входе контроллера появилась????
Вернуться к началу

пэлк	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Ср, 06 май 2015, 15:58
Новичок Зарегистрирован: Вс, 15 мар 2015, 13:07 Сообщения: 16	Убил я 41 ошибку.теперь пише ер 52 и едеть зараза только вниз.вверх вообще не реагирует что может быть подскажите уважаемые колеги
Вернуться к началу

Джентльмен	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Ср, 06 май 2015, 16:00
Зарегистрирован: Вт, 21 фев 2012, 01:04 Сообщения: 505 Откуда: Россия Реальное имя: Dmitrii	Данную тему почитай с первой страницы, это уже обсуждалось.
Вернуться к началу

пэлк	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Пт, 08 май 2015, 07:47
Новичок Зарегистрирован: Вс, 15 мар 2015, 13:07 Сообщения: 16
Вернуться к началу

YAN	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Пт, 15 май 2015, 12:01
Новичок Зарегистрирован: Чт, 16 сен 2010, 15:19 Сообщения: 8	Уважаемые коллеги подскажите, что означает ошибка Еrr58. В документации NICE3000 нет описания этой ошибки. Цепи безопасности собраны, двери закрыты, но в инспекции не идет.
Вернуться к началу

tim55	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Сб, 16 май 2015, 00:44
Зарегистрирован: Вс, 04 авг 2013, 13:53 Сообщения: 230 Откуда: Казахстан.Алмата Реальное имя: Тимур	Лифт на стадии наладки? Какие светодиоды горят?? _________________ — Нет ничего более стимулирующего, чем когда всё идёт не так как надо.
Вернуться к началу

Naladchik2006	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Сб, 16 май 2015, 01:03
Зарегистрирован: Вт, 09 июн 2009, 20:13 Сообщения: 5372 Откуда: Москва SKYPE: naladchik2006 Реальное имя: Евгений	Да описывали уже эту ошибку на обоих форумах. _________________ постоянно всё забываю — так что если кому-то что-то пообещал -напоминайте.
Вернуться к началу

пэлк	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Вс, 17 май 2015, 15:41
Новичок Зарегистрирован: Вс, 15 мар 2015, 13:07 Сообщения: 16	Господа наладчики подскажите найс 3000 ошибка ер 80 кто сталкивался?
Вернуться к началу

Джентльмен	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Вс, 17 май 2015, 17:07
Зарегистрирован: Вт, 21 фев 2012, 01:04 Сообщения: 505 Откуда: Россия Реальное имя: Dmitrii	Судя по мануалу, а конкретно по спецификации контрольной системы, 80- конечный выключатель. Я бы посмотрел на индикацию входных сигналов для начала.
Вернуться к началу

Naladchik2006	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Вс, 17 май 2015, 17:48
Зарегистрирован: Вт, 09 июн 2009, 20:13 Сообщения: 5372 Откуда: Москва SKYPE: naladchik2006 Реальное имя: Евгений	80-я это тест на логику. _________________ постоянно всё забываю — так что если кому-то что-то пообещал -напоминайте.
Вернуться к началу

Джентльмен	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Вс, 17 май 2015, 18:04
Зарегистрирован: Вт, 21 фев 2012, 01:04 Сообщения: 505 Откуда: Россия Реальное имя: Dmitrii	Злюка
Вернуться к началу

пэлк	Заголовок сообщения: Re: NICE 3000 Добавлено: Пн, 18 май 2015, 16:20
Новичок Зарегистрирован: Вс, 15 мар 2015, 13:07 Сообщения: 16	Господа наладчики подскажите найс 3000 ошибка ер 16 кто сталкивался за ранее спасибо
Вернуться к началу